You are on page 1of 189

AllenBradley

Remote I/O
Adapter Module
(Cat. No. 1747ASB)

User
Manual

Important User
Information

Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this


publication, those responsible for the application and use of this
control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps
have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all
performance and safety requirements, including any applicable laws,
regulations, codes, and standards.
The illustrations, charts, sample programs and layout examples
shown in this guide are intended solely for purposes of example.
Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any
particular installation, Allen-Bradley does not assume responsibility
or liability (to include intellectual property liability) for actual use
based on the examples shown in this publication.
Allen-Bradley publication SGI-1.1, Safety Guidelines for the
Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid-State Control
(available from your local Allen-Bradley office), describes some
important differences between solid-state equipment and
electromechanical devices that should be taken into consideration
when applying products such as those described in this publication.
Reproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication, in
whole or in part, without written permission of Allen-Bradley
Company, Inc., is prohibited.
Throughout this manual, we use notes to make you aware of safety
considerations:

ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices


or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or
death, property damage, or economic loss.

Attention statements help you to:


identify a hazard
avoid the hazard
recognize the consequences
Important:

Identifies information that is critical for successful


application and understanding of the product.

PLC, PLC-2, PLC-3, and PLC-5 are registered trademarks of the Allen-Bradley Company, Inc.
SLC, SLC 500, PLC-5/11, PLC-5/12, PLC-5/15, PLC-5/20, PLC-5/25, PLC-5/30, PLC-5/40, PLC-5/60, PLC5-250,
PanelView, and RediPANEL are trademarks of Allen-Bradley Company, Inc.
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines, Incorporated.

Summary of Changes

Summary of Changes
The information below summarizes the changes to this manual since
the last printing.
To help you find new information and updated information in this
release of the manual, we have included change bars as shown to the
right of this paragraph.

New Information

The table below lists sections that document new features and
additional information about existing features, and shows where to
find this new information.
For This New Information

See Chapter

Compatible Modules

Grounding Guidelines

Appendix B

Master Control Relays and EmergencyStop switches

Appendix B

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Table of Contents

Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

P-1

Who Should Use this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Purpose of this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents of this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Techniques Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AllenBradley Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local Product Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Product Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Your Questions or Comments on this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

P-1
P-1
P-2
P-3
P-3
P-5
P-6
P-6
P-6
P-6

Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

soc-i

New Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

soc-i

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1

1747ASB Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Remote I/O Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How The Scanner Interacts With Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanner I/O Image Division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Crossing Logical Rack Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating More Than One Logical Device by Crossing a Logical
Rack Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transferring Data With RIO Discrete and Block Transfers . . . . .
RIO Discrete Transfer Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical and Logical RIO Link Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extended Node Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compatible RIO Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compatible RIO Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compatible Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1747ASB Module Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Display and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIP Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RIO Link and Processor Restart Lockout Connector . . . . . . . . .
Door Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SelfLocking Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Tie Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manufacturing Test Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1
1-2
1-2
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-7
1-9
1-9
1-10
1-11
1-12
1-12
1-13
1-13
1-13
1-14
1-15
1-15
1-15
1-15

ii

Table of Contents

Quick Start for Experienced Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1

Required Tools and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SW2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SW1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SW3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1
2-2
2-3
2-3
2-3

Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1

Chassis Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slot Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Addressing I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2Slot Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2Slot Addressing Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2Slot Addressing Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1Slot Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1Slot Addressing Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1Slot Addressing Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1/2Slot Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1/2Slot Addressing Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1/2Slot Addressing Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How I/O Module Images Are Mapped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How Discrete I/O Modules Are Mapped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How Specialty I/O Module Images Are Mapped . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When Block Transfer Mode is Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When Discrete Mode is Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-13
3-14
3-14
3-15

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1

DIP Switch Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


DIP Switch SW1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logical Rack Number (SW11 through 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logical Group Number (SW17,8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIP Switch SW2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Baud Rate (SW21,2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Primary/Complementary Chassis (SW23) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reserved (SW24) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASB Module Image Size (SW25, 6, 7, 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Image and Chassis Size Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Not Enough 1747ASB Module Image to Map All of the
Available Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1747ASB Image Size Exceeds Slot Requirements . . . . . . . . . .
One Slot of Pair is Present, and 1747ASB Module Image is
Available for Both Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Both Slots Of A Pair Are Available But There Is Only Enough
1747ASB Module Image Space Available For One Slot . . . .

4-1
4-2
4-2
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-9
4-9
4-13
4-13
4-14
4-14
4-15

Table of Contents

iii

DIP Switch SW3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Hold Last State (SW31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Processor Restart Lockout (SW32) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Link Response Time (SW33) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup (SW34) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Addressing Mode (SW35,6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specialty I/O Mode (SW37) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Module Keying (SW38) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch Setting Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SW1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SW2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SW3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-15
4-15
4-17
4-18
4-19
4-20
4-20
4-21
4-22
4-22
4-22
4-23

Installation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1

European Union Directive Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the 1747ASB Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Link Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Link Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring a Processor Restart Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Module Addressing Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a PLC as a Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using an SLC as a Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octal Label Kit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying the Octal Filter Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying the Octal Door Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octal Kit and I/O Module Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1
5-1
5-1
5-2
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-6
5-6
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-8

StartUp and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1

System StartUp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Powerup and Initialization Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inhibit Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Expansion Chassis Power Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Invalid RIO Link Transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RIO Discrete or Block Transfers To Empty or Nonexistent
Chassis Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RIO Discrete Transfers To Block Transfer Chassis Slots . . . . . .
RIO Block Transfers To Discrete Chassis Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Invalid Length RIO Block Transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing the 1747ASB Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1
6-1
6-2
6-2
6-2
6-3
6-3
6-5
6-5
6-6
6-6
6-6
6-7
6-7

iv

Table of Contents

I/O Module Installation and Removal Under Power . . . . . . . . . . . .


I/O Module Insertion into a Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Module Removal from a Scanned Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Module Removal from an Unscanned Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-9
6-9
6-9
6-10

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-1

Troubleshooting Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contacting AllenBradley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Operating Codes.A for Normal Operating Conditions . . . . .
Error Operating Codes for Error Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIP Switch Configuration Mismatch Fault Codes - Codes 1 and 2
I/O Module Configuration Mismatch Fault Codes - Code 3 . . . . .
I/O Runtime Fault Codes - Code 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-1
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-5
7-6
7-7

Application Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-1

Basic SLC 500 Example - Using an RIO Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . .


RIO Device Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SLC Processor Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1747ASB Module Configuration Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1747ASB Module I/O Mapping Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RIO Address Label Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Example Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SLC 500 Example - Using an RIO Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RIO Device Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SLC Processor Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1747ASB Module 1 Configuration Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1747ASB Module 2 Configuration Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1747ASB Module 1 I/O Mapping Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1747ASB Module 2 I/O Mapping Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RIO Address Label Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Example Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC5 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RIO Device Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC Processor Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1747ASB Module 1 Configuration Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1747ASB Module 2 Configuration Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1747ASB Module 1 I/O Mapping Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1747ASB Module 2 I/O Mapping Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RIO Address Label Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Example Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8
8-9
8-10
8-11
8-12
8-13
8-14
8-15
8-16
8-17
8-18
8-19
8-20
8-21
8-22
8-23
8-24

Table of Contents

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-1

Adapter Operating Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Network Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Baud Rate Determination of Maximum Cable Length and
Terminating Resistor Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Throughput Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete Throughput Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating Throughput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete I/O Throughput without Block Transfers Present . . . . . .
RIO Scan Time Calculation (TRIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1747ASB Module Backplane Scan Time (Tbp) . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete I/O Throughput without Block Transfers
Present Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete I/O Throughput with Block Transfers Present . . . . . . . .
Discrete I/O Throughput with Block Transfers Present Example
Block Transfer Throughput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-1
A-1

A-7
A-8
A-10
A-11

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System . . . . . .

B-1

Selecting Your SLC 500/1746 Control Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . .


Power Supply Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example for Selecting a 1746 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chassis 1 Contains: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chassis 2 Contains: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SLC 500 System Installation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting an Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spacing Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preventing Excessive Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master Control Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EmergencyStop Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Schematic (Using IEC Symbols) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Schematic (Using ANSI/CSA Symbols) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loss of Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input States on Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Types of Line Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Conditioning Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-1
B-2
B-3
B-3
B-3
B-6
B-6
B-6
B-7
B-8
B-8
B-9
B-11
B-12
B-12
B-13
B-13
B-14
B-14
B-14
B-15
B-15
B-15

A-1
A-2
A-2
A-4
A-4
A-5
A-6

vi

Table of Contents

Special Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Excessive Line Voltage Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Excessive Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class I, Division 2 Applications (United States Only) . . . . . . .
Output Contact Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting Your Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting Modular Hardware Style Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leftside View (all chassis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1746A4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1746A7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1746A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1746A13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Link Coupler (AIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Your I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features of an SLC 500 I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of Sinking and Sourcing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Output Circuits - ac or dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solid State dc I/O Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sourcing Device with Sinking Input Module Circuit . . . . . . . . .
Sinking Device with Sourcing Input Module Circuit . . . . . . . . .
Sinking Device with Sourcing Output Module Circuit . . . . . . .
Sourcing Device with Sinking Output Module Circuit . . . . . . .
Inserting I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring the I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Removable Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the RTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the RTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating Heat Dissipation for Your Control System . . . . . . . . . .
Module Heat Dissipation: Calculated Watts vs. Maximum Watts .
Calculating the Power Supply Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determining the Power Supply Dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example Heat Dissipation Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-16
B-16
B-16
B-18
B-18
B-19
B-19
B-19
B-19
B-20
B-20
B-21
B-21
B-22
B-22
B-23
B-23
B-23
B-24
B-24
B-24
B-25
B-25
B-26
B-27
B-28
B-28
B-29
B-30
B-30
B-31
B-33
B-34

Differences Between the 1747ASB Module and the


1771ASB Series C Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-1

Image Size Selection (page 4-9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Hold Last State Operation (page 4-15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Expansion Chassis (page 3-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting and Removing I/O Modules Under Power (page 6-9) . . . .
Starting Logical Group Number Selection (page 4-4) . . . . . . . . . .
Specialty I/O Module Image Mapping and Control (page 3-13) . . . .
DIP Switch Locations (chapter 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Module Keying (page 4-21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Slot Numbering (page 3-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-1
C-2
C-2
C-3
C-3
C-3
C-4
C-4
C-4

Table of Contents

vii

Status Indication (page 7-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Throughput (page A-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inhibit Functionality (page 6-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-5
C-5
C-5

DIP Switch and Address Configuration Worksheets . . . . .

D-1

DIP Switch Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Address Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D-1
D-3

Preface

Preface
Read this preface to familiarize yourself with the rest of the manual.
This preface covers the following topics:
who should use this manual
the purpose of this manual
terms and abbreviations
conventions used in this manual
Allen-Bradley support

Who Should Use this Manual

Use this manual if you are responsible for designing, installing,


programming, or troubleshooting control systems that use
Allen-Bradley small logic controllers.
You should have a basic understanding of PLCR and SLC 500t
products. You should understand programmable controllers and be
able to interpret the ladder logic instructions required to control your
application. If you do not, contact your local Allen-Bradley
representative for information on available training courses before
using this product.

Purpose of this Manual

This manual is a learning and reference guide for the remote I/O
adapter module. It describes the procedures you use to address,
configure, install, and operate the 1747-ASB remote I/O adapter
module.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

P2

Preface

Contents of this Manual


Chapter

Contents

Preface

Describes the purpose, background, and scope of


this manual. Also specifies the audience for whom
this manual is intended.

Overview

Explains and illustrates the theory behind the


1747ASB module's operation. Covers hardware
and software features, compatible devices, and
setup.

Quick Start
for Experienced Users

Serves as a Quick Start Guide for the 1747ASB


module.

Addressing

Gives a chassis overview, and explains slot


numbering, I/O module image mapping, 2slot,
1slot, and 1/2slot addressing.

Configuration

Contains DIP switch information, and shows odd


size chassis and image conditions.

Installation and Wiring

Provides installation procedures and wiring


guidelines.

Startup and Operation

Explains powerup and initialization sequences,


normal operation, communication exceptions,
remote expansion power loss, invalid RIO link
transfers, and testing the 1747ASB module.

Troubleshooting

Shows how to interpret and correct problems with


your 1747ASB module.

Application Examples

Examines both SLC 500 and PLC5/40t


applications using a 1747ASB module. Gives
examples of the ladder programming necessary to
achieve the described result.

Specifications

Contains 1747ASB and RIO link specifications, as


well as throughput information.

Appendix B

Understanding Your
SLC 500/1746 Control
System

Provides power supply specifications,


recommendations for safely installing your control
system, instructions for mounting your control
system and installing and wiring your I/O modules,
and ways to calculate heat dissipation for your
control system.

Appendix C

Differences Between the


1747ASB and 1771ASB
Series C Modules

Provides a pointbypoint comparison of the 1747


and 1771 ASB modules.

Appendix D

Worksheets

Contains worksheets for setting the 1747ASB


module's DIP switches and addressing remote I/O
modules with an SLC processor.

Appendix A

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Title

Preface

P3

Related Documentation
The following documents contain additional information concerning
Allen-Bradley SLCt and PLC products. To obtain a copy, contact
your local Allen-Bradley office or distributor.
For

Read This Document

Document
Number

An overview of the SLC 500 family of products

SLC 500 System Overview

17472.30

A description on how to install and use your Modular SLC 500


programmable controller

Installation & Operation Manual for Modular


Hardware Style Programmable Controllers

17476.2

Information regarding the use of a 1747KE module as a


communications interface

DH485/RS232C Interface Module User Manual

17476.12

Information regarding the use of the 1747DCM as a remote I/O


device

Direct Communication Module User Manual

1747NM007

Information regarding the use of the 1747SN SLC RIO scanner

RIO Scanner User Manual

17476.6

Information regarding the use of analog modules with the SLC 500
system

SLC 500 Analog I/O Modules User Manual

17466.4

Information regarding programming your BASIC module

SLC 500 BASIC Language Reference

17466.3

Indepth information on grounding and wiring AllenBradley


programmable controllers

AllenBradley Programmable Controller Grounding


and Wiring Guidelines

17704.1

A description on how to install a PLC5r system

PLC5 Family Programmable Controllers Hardware


Installation Manual

17856.6.1

A description of important differences between solidstate


programmable controller products and hardwired
electromechanical devices

Application Considerations for SolidState Controls

SGI1.1

An article on wire sizes and types for grounding electrical


equipment

National Electrical Code

Published by the
National Fire
Protection
Association of
Boston, MA.

A complete listing of current AllenBradley documentation,


including ordering instructions. Also indicates whether the
documents are available on CDROM or in multilanguages.

AllenBradley Publication Index

SD499

A glossary of industrial automation terms and abbreviations

AllenBradley Industrial Automation Glossary

AG7.1

Terms and Abbreviations

The following terms and abbreviations are specific to this product.


For a complete listing of Allen-Bradley terminology, refer to the
Allen-Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary, Publication Number
AG-7.1.
Adapter Any physical device that is a slave on the RIO link.
Adapter Image That portion of the scanner image assigned to an
individual adapter. You configure the adapter image by assigning it a
starting logical rack number, starting logical group number and the
number of logical groups it uses. In the case of the 1747-ASB
module, this is referred to as the 1747-ASB module image.
ASB Module The Catalog Number 1747-ASB Remote I/O
Adapter Module. The 1747-ASB module is an adapter.
Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

P4

Preface

ASB Module Chassis The chassis directly controlled by the


1747-ASB module. This includes the remote chassis and (if
installed) two remote expansion chassis.
Discrete I/O Module An I/O module used to sense or control
two-state (ON/OFF) devices.
Inhibit A function by which the scanner stops communicating with
a logical device. The logical device will consider itself inhibited if it
does not receive communications from the scanner within a certain
period of time.
I/O Module Any 1746 or 1747 I/O module that is supported by the
1747-ASB module.
Local Expansion Chassis A chassis that is connected to a local
SLC chassis using a 1747-C9 (91.4 cm [36 in.]) or 1747-C7 (15.2 cm
[6 in.]) cable.
Local PLC Chassis The 1771 chassis that contains a PLC
processor and scanner.
Local SLC Chassis The chassis that contains the SLC processor
and scanner.
Logical Device Any portion of a logical rack that is assigned to a
single adapter. Adapters may appear as more than one logical
device.
Logical Group A logical group consists of one input and one
output word within a logical rack. A word consists of 16 bits, each
bit represents one terminal on a discrete I/O module.
Logical Rack A fixed section of the scanner image comprised of
eight input words and eight output words.
Logical Slot A logical slot consists of one input and one output
byte within a logical group. A byte consists of 8 bits, each bit
represents one terminal on a discrete I/O module.
PLC Chassis A physical PLC rack that houses 1771 I/O modules
and PLC processors.
Remote Chassis The chassis containing a 1747-ASB module and
connected to the local SLC or PLC chassis via the RIO link.
Remote Expansion Chassis A chassis that is connected to a
remote chassis using a 1747-C9 (91.4 cm [36 in.]) or 1747-C7
(15.2 cm [6 in.]) cable.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Preface

P5

Reset, Adapter Decide Commands sent by the scanner to a logical


device during an RIO discrete transfer. These commands instruct the
logical device to reset all of its discrete outputs if hold last state is
not selected, or to hold all of its discrete outputs in their last state if
hold last state is selected.
Reset, Adapter Reset Commands sent by the scanner to a logical
device during an RIO discrete transfer. These commands instruct the
logical device to reset all of its discrete outputs regardless of the hold
last state selection.
RIO Block Transfer The exchange of up to 64 words of data
between the scanner and adapter. RIO block transfers only occur if
you program them in your processor control program. The
1747-ASB module supports a block transfer of up to 8 words.
RIO Discrete Transfer The exchange of image data between the
scanner and adapter. RIO discrete transfers occur continuously
whenever the scanner and adapter are communicating on the RIO
link.
RIO Link An Allen-Bradley communication system supporting
high-speed serial transfer of Remote I/O (RIO) control information.
This link consists of one master one or more slaves.
Scanner The communication master on the RIO link.
Scanner Image The data table area within the scanner, used to
exchange I/O information between the scanner and all the adapters
on the RIO link. The scanner image is a portion of the SLC or PLC
processor image.
SLC Chassis A physical SLC rack that houses SLC processors,
1746 and 1747 I/O modules.
Slot The physical location in any chassis used to insert I/O
modules.
Specialty I/O Module An I/O module other than a discrete I/O
module (e.g., an analog module).

Common Techniques Used in


this Manual

The following conventions are used throughout this manual:


Bulleted lists such as this one provide information, not procedural
steps.
Numbered lists provide sequential steps or hierarchical
information.
Italic type is used for emphasis.
Text in this font indicates words or phrases you should type.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

P6

Preface

AllenBradley Support

Allen-Bradley offers support services worldwide, with over 75


Sales/Support Offices, 512 authorized Distributors and 260
authorized Systems Integrators located throughout the United States
alone, plus Allen-Bradley representatives in every major country in
the world.

Local Product Support


Contact your local Allen-Bradley representative for:
sales and order support
product technical training
warranty support
support service agreements

Technical Product Assistance


If you need to contact Allen-Bradley for technical assistance, please
review the information in the Troubleshooting chapter first. Then
call your local Allen-Bradley representative.

Your Questions or Comments on this Manual


If you find a problem with this manual, please notify us of it on the
enclosed Publication Problem Report.
If you have any suggestions for how this manual could be made
more useful to you, please contact us at the address below:
Allen-Bradley Company, Inc.
Automation Group
Technical Communication, Dept. 602V, T122
P.O. Box 2086
Milwaukee, WI 53201-2086

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Chapter

Overview
This chapter presents:
1747-ASB module overview
remote I/O overview
compatible devices
1747-ASB module features
setup and operational overview

1747ASB Module Overview

The 1747-ASB module is an SLC 500 single-slot, RIO


communication link module. It occupies the first slot (slot 0) of a
1746 remote chassis, where the SLC processor normally resides.
The 1747-ASB module is an adapter, or slave, on the RIO link, and
the master of the remote chassis and remote expansion chassis it is
installed in. Remote expansion chassis are optional. It acts as a
gateway between the scanner and the I/O modules residing in the
remote chassis and remote expansion chassis. The 1747-ASB
module maps the image of the I/O modules in its remote chassis and
remote expansion chassis directly to the SLC or PLC processor
image.
Output data is sent from the scanner of either the SLC or PLC local
chassis to the 1747-ASB module across the RIO link. This data is
automatically transferred to the output modules across the chassis
backplane by the 1747-ASB module. Inputs from the input modules
are collected via the backplane by the 1747-ASB module and sent
back to the scanner across the RIO link. No user programming of
the 1747-ASB module is necessary.
1747ASB Module

Supervisory SLC (or PLC)


Remote Chassis
RIO Link

Remote Expansion Chassis

1747ASB module
Outputs to
Modules

Inputs from
Modules

Remote Chassis
1747ASB Module

Remote Chassis

Remote Expansion Chassis

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

12

Overview

Remote I/O Overview

To better understand the use of the 1747-ASB module, you should


have an understanding of the RIO link. The RIO link is an
Allen-Bradley communications system supporting high-speed
transfer of control information. An RIO link consists of a single
master device and one or more slave devices. The master device is
referred to as the scanner. The slave devices are referred to as
adapters (such as the 1747-ASB module).
RIO scanners and adapters work together to serially communicate
PLC or SLC processor data to remotely located I/O devices. PLC
and SLC processors exchange inputs and outputs with scanners.
Scanners exchange inputs and outputs with adapters located on the
RIO link. The adapters control is based on the adapter type.

How The Scanner Interacts With Adapters


The scanners function is to continuously scan the adapters on the
RIO link in a consecutive manner. The scan consists of one or more
RIO discrete transfers to each adapter on the RIO link.
RIO discrete transfers consist of the scanner sending output image
data and communication commands to the adapter that instruct the
adapter on how to control its output. (These include run, reset,
adapter reset, and reset decide commands.) The adapter responds by
sending input data to the scanner. The scanner performs as many
RIO discrete transfers as necessary to update the entire adapter
image. If RIO discrete transfers do not occur, data is not exchanged
between the scanner and adapter.
Important:

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

RIO discrete transfers are asynchronous with the


processor scan.

Overview

13

1747ASB Module
Processor

RIO Discrete
Transfers
with Adapter 1

Scanner

SLC Local Chassis


RIO Link

Remote Chassis

Remote Expansion Chassis

RIO Discrete
Transfers
with Adapter 2
PanelViewt Operator Terminal
1747ASB Module

RIO Discrete
Transfers
with Adapter 3

Remote Chassis

Remote Expansion Chassis

RIO Discrete
Transfers
with Adapter 4
RediPANEL

1747ASB Module

Processor/Scanner

RIO Discrete
Transfers
with Adapter 1

PLC Local
Chassis

RIO Link

Remote Chassis

Remote Expansion Chassis

RIO Discrete
Transfers
with Adapter 2
PanelView Operator Terminal
1747ASB Module

RIO Discrete
Transfers
with Adapter 3

Remote Chassis

Remote Expansion Chassis

RIO Discrete
Transfers
with Adapter 4
RediPANEL

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

14

Overview

Scanner I/O Image Division


The scanner allows each adapter to use a fixed amount (user defined)
of the scanners input and output image. Part of the processors
image is used by local I/O, the other portion is used by the scanner
for remote I/O. For a PLC-5, logical rack 0 is dedicated for local
I/O.
The scanners remote I/O image is divided into logical racks and
further divided into logical groups. A full logical rack consists of
eight input and eight output image words. A logical group consists
of one input and one output word in a logical rack. Each logical
group is assigned a number from 07. The number of racks
available for remote I/O depends on the scanner you are using.

Local I/O

Logical Rack 0

Remote I/O
(Scanner Image)

Logical Rack 1
Logical Rack 2
Logical Rack 3

Processor I/O
Image

Logical Group 0
Logical Group 7

Scanner I/O
Image

Adapter
Image

The scanner image also contains the image of each adapter on the
RIO link. The adapter is assigned a portion of the scanner image,
which is referred to as the adapter image.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Overview

15

Crossing Logical Rack Boundaries


Adapter image size is expressed in an even number of groups. For
example, the 1747-ASB module image can be any size between 2
logical groups and 32 logical groups (4 logical racks), in 2 logical
group increments.
If the adapters image size is greater than 8 logical groups, the image
crosses logical rack boundaries. If an adapters image size is less
than 8 logical groups, it too can cross a logical rack boundary
depending upon the starting logical group number. The significance
of crossing logical rack boundaries is discussed in the next section.

Scanner Input or Output Image


Bit Number (Octal)
Bit Number (Decimal)

Logical
Rack 0

Logical
Rack 1

17

10 7

15

8 7

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

Scanner Input or Output Image


Bit Number (Octal)
Bit Number (Decimal)

Adapter
Image

Logical
Rack 0

Logical
Rack 1

Adapter image is 12 logical groups in size and


crosses a logical rack boundary due to its size.

Important:

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

17

10 7

15

8 7

Adapter
Image

Adapter image is 6 logical groups in size and crosses a logical


rack boundary due to its starting logical group number.

Due to SLC and PLC addressing differences, when the


1747-ASB module is used with an SLC processor, the
image bit numbers are 07, 815 decimal. When the
1747-ASB module is used with a PLC processor, the
image bit numbers are 07, 1017 octal. The I/O image
figures, like the two above, indicate the type of image
bit numbers used (octal, decimal, or both) throughout
this manual.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

16

Overview

Creating More Than One Logical Device by Crossing a Logical


Rack Boundary
RIO discrete transfers occur on a logical device basis, not an adapter
basis. A logical device is any portion of a logical rack that is
assigned to a single adapter.
When an adapters image is more than one logical device, the
scanner sees the single adapter as multiple adapters on the RIO link.
The scanner communicates with each logical device independently,
even if the logical devices are all assigned to one adapter. If an
adapter image is more than one logical device, the following is true:
Not all of the adapter image is updated by the scanner at the same
time. The number of logical devices determines the number of
RIO discrete transfers that are needed to update the entire adapter
image.
The adapter may receive different communication commands for
each logical device. In this case, the adapter decides which
command it responds to.

Scanner Input or Output Image

In this example, two RIO


discrete transfers are
required for the scanner
to update the adapter
image containing two
logical devices.

Bit Number (Octal)

17

10 7

Bit Number (Decimal)

15

8 7

Logical
Rack 0

Logical
Rack 1

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

Logical
Device

Adapter
Image

Logical
Device

To understand how an adapters logical devices are assigned, use


appendix D to determine the address configuration of your remote
I/O modules. You may then want to reassign certain adapters so
their images do not cross logical rack boundaries, allowing the
scanner to update their images in one RIO discrete transfer.
Important:

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

The 1747-ASB module always functions as one adapter


on the RIO link, even though it may contain more than
one logical device. For example, the 1747-ASB module
does not begin normal operation until all of its logical
devices are receiving RIO discrete transfers from the
scanner.

Overview

17

Transferring Data With RIO Discrete and Block Transfers


Input and output image data and command information is quickly
exchanged between a scanner and adapter using RIO discrete
transfers. RIO discrete transfers are the simplest way a scanner and
adapter communicate with each other. RIO discrete transfers, which
are transparent to the user, consist of the scanner sending the output
image data to the adapter, and the adapter transmitting input data to
the scanner. Each RIO discrete transfer also contains scanner
commands for the adapter.
RIO block transfers are initiated by a special command from the
PLC processor, typically when large amounts of data must be
exchanged with one specialty I/O module. Block transfers use the
basic RIO discrete transfer mechanism of the RIO link. However,
the actual transfer of data occurs asynchronous to the discrete
transfers. It is possible for several discrete transfers to occur before
a block transfer is processed.
RIO Discrete Transfer Example
This example illustrates how additional discrete transfers are
required when an adapter image crosses logical rack boundaries. It
consists of one scanner and three adapters. Adapter 1 requires one
RIO discrete transfer from the scanner to update its entire image.
Adapter 2 requires two RIO discrete transfers to update its image.
Adapter 3 requires three RIO discrete transfers to update its image.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

18

Overview

Scanner Input or Output Image

Bit Number (Octal)


Bit Number (Decimal)

17

10 7

15

8 7

Group 0

Logical
Rack 0

Adapter 1
Logical Device 1
Adapter 2
Logical Device 1

Logical
Rack 1

Adapter 2
Logical Device 2
Adapter 3
Logical Device 1

Logical
Rack 2

Logical
Rack 3

Adapter 3
Logical Device 2

Adapter 3
Logical Device 3

Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5

Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2

1747-ASB Module
to scanner

Adapter 1 Configured As:


Starting Logical Rack:
Starting Logical Group:
Adapter Image Size:

Adapter 2 Configured As:

Group 3
Group 4

Starting Logical Rack:


Starting Logical Group:
Adapter Image Size:

0
0
6 logical groups

0
6
8 logical groups

Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2

Adapter 3 Configured As:


Starting Logical Rack:
Starting Logical Group:
Adapter Image Size:

1
6
18 logical groups

Group 3
Group 4

Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

The scanner updates the adapter image in one RIO discrete transfer because the adapter image
is contained within one logical rack.
The scanner updates the adapter image in two RIO discrete transfers because the adapter image
crosses a logical rack boundary making the adapter image appear as two logical devices.
The scanner updates the adapter image in three RIO discrete transfers because the adapter
image crosses two logical rack boundaries making the adapter image appear as three logical
devices.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Overview

19

Physical and Logical RIO Link Specifications


The maximum number of adapters that your scanner can
communicate with is determined by the scanner and adapters
physical and logical specifications, as described below:
Physical Specifications are the maximum number of adapters that
can be connected to the scanner. For more information, see
Extended Node Capability below.
Logical Specifications for the scanner are the maximum number of
logical racks the scanner can address, how the logical racks can be
assigned, and whether the scanner can perform block transfers.
For adapters, logical specification refers to the maximum size of the
adapters RIO image.
Extended Node Capability
Both scanners and adapters can have extended node capability.
Extended node capability allows you to use an 82 Ohm termination
resistor at both ends of the RIO link for all baud rates. Extended
node capability also allows for up to 32 adapters to be placed on the
RIO link.
Extended node capability can only be used if the scanner and all
adapters on the RIO link have extended node capability. The
1747-ASB module has extended node capability.
The tables on pages 110 and 111 provide lists of compatible RIO
scanners and adapters.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

110

Overview

Compatible RIO Scanners

The 1747-ASB module is compatible with all Allen-Bradley


scanners. Scanners that do not support RIO block transfers do not
work with all of the I/O modules supported by the 1747-ASB
module. For example, the Catalog Number 1747-SN Series A, RIO
Scanner does not work with a Catalog Number 1746-BAS, BASIC
module because the scanner does not support RIO block transfer.
Refer to the appropriate scanner manual for details concerning
physical and logical specifications.
Catalog
Number

Description

1771SN

Sub I/O scanner for MiniPLC2R


and PLC5 families

1772SD,
SD2

Remote scanner/distribution
panel for PLC2 family

1775S4A,
S4B, S5
1775SR,
SR5

I/O scannerprogrammer interface


module for PLC3R family
Remote scanner/distribution
panel for PLC3/10 family

1785L11B

PLC5/11t (in scanner mode)

1785LT/x

PLC5/15t (in scanner mode)

1785L20B

PLC5/20t (in scanner mode)

1785LT2

PLC5/25t (in scanner mode)

1785L30x

PLC5/30t (in scanner mode)

1785L40x

PLC5/40 (in scanner mode)

1785L60x

PLC5/60t (in scanner mode)

5250RS

Remote scanner for PLC5/250t

1747SN

SLC Remote I/O Scanner

6008SI

IBMR PC I/O Scanner Module

6008SV

VMEbus I/O Scanner Module

6008SQH1,
SQH2

Qbus I/0 Scanner Module

Revision D or later.
Rev. 3 or later.
Extended node capability not available with Series A.
Extended node capability.
PLC5/15 Series B Revision H or later have partial rack addressing. Earlier versions are limited to
3 devices.
PLC5/25 Series A Revision D or later have partial rack addressing. Earlier versions are limited to
7 devices.
Series A scanner does not have block transfer.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Overview

Compatible RIO Adapters

111

The 1747-ASB module can physically reside on the RIO link with
any other adapter. The following table lists the adapters available for
use with an RIO link.
Catalog
Number

Description

1785LT/x

PLC5/15 (in adapter mode)

1785LT2

PLC5/25 (in adapter mode)

1785LT3

PLC5/12t (in adapter mode)

1785L30x

PLC5/30 (in adapter mode)

1785L40x

PLC5/40 (in adapter mode)

1785L60x

PLC5/60 (in adapter mode)

1771ASC

Remote I/O Adapter Module

1771ASB

Remote I/O Adapter Module

1771AM1

1Slot I/O Chassis W/Integral


Power Supply and Adapter

1771AM2

2Slot I/O Chassis W/Integral


Power Supply and Adapter

1784F30D

Plant Floor Terminal Remote I/O


Expansion Module

1771RIO

Remote I/O Interface Module

1771JAB

Single Point I/O Adapter Module

1771DCM

Direct Communication Module

1778ASB

Remote I/O Adapter Module

1747DCM

Direct Communication Module

2706xxxx

DL40 Dataliner

2705xxx

RediPANEL

2711xx

PanelView Terminal

1336G2

Remote I/O Adapter for 1336 AC


Industrial Drives

1395NA

Remote I/O Adapter for 1395 DC


Industrial Drives

1747ASB

Remote I/O Adapter Module

Extended node capability


In adapter mode
Series A, B, and C
Extended node capability for Series B and C
Must be Catalog Number 2706ExxxxxB1

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

112

Overview

Compatible Modules

1747ASB Module Features

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

The 1747-ASB module supports all SLC 5/01 compatible I/O


modules (class 0 and 1). The following modules can be placed in the
remote chassis and remote expansion chassis:
all discrete I/O modules
all analog I/O modules
BASIC Module, Catalog Number 1746-BAS (SLC 5/01 mode)
IMC 110 Motion Control Module, Catalog Number 1746-HS
Distributed I/O Scanner, Catalog Number 1747-DSN (SLC 5/01
mode)
Direct Communication Module, Catalog Number 1747-DCM
Thermocouple/mV Input Module, Catalog Number 1746-NT4
RTD/Resistance Module, Catalog Number 1746-NR4
RS-232/DH-485 Communication Interface Module, Catalog
Number 1747-KE

The 1747-ASB module has the following features:


communicates I/O data up to a maximum of 3040 meters
(10,000 feet)
supports 57.6K, 115.2K, and 230.4K baud operation on the RIO
link
supports any mix of 1746 discrete or analog I/O
controls up to 30 slots using remote expansion chassis
allows use of 2-slot, 1-slot, and 1/2-slot addressing
allows for image sizes between 2 and 32 logical groups (user
selectable)
incorporates enhanced operating status and troubleshooting
capability using three 7-segment displays
provides non-volatile memory for convenient I/O module slot
keying
provides discrete output module hold last state selection
provides RIO link processor restart lockout selection
incorporates extended node capability
supports RIO block transfers and RIO discrete transfers for
analog and other specialty I/O modules
supports complementary I/O on the RIO link

Overview

113

Hardware Features
The 1747-ASB modules hardware features are highlighted below.
Detailed installation, operation, and troubleshooting information is
contained in chapters 5, 6, and 7.
COMM LED
(Green)

FAULT LED
(Red)

DIP Switches

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FRN

3
4

O
N
8

O
N

FAC 1M

MADE IN USA

5
6

ADDR
MODE
SP MODE

KEY

IMPORTANT:
INSTALL IN SLOT ZERO OF MODULAR CHASSIS ONLY
CURRENT REQUIREMENT: 375mA

RESP

OPERATING
TEMPERATURE
CODE T3C

HLS
PRL
LAST CHA

SA

IMAGE
SIZE
(LSB)

RET

SW3

RIO Link and


Processor
Restart
Lockout
Connector

RSV
(MSB)

IN

BAUD
RATE
PRI/COMP

NC

SW2

LINE 2

SHLD

LINE 1

LISTED IND. CONT. EQ.


FOR HAZ. LOC. A196

Manufacturing Test Plug

CLASS 1, GROUPS A, B, C AND D, DIV. 2

7
8

LOGICAL
GROUP

UL

Door
Label

(LSB)

SLC 500
REMOTE I/O ADAPTER MODULE
SER

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SW1

LOGICAL
RACK

CAT

O
N

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SERIAL NO.

O
N

(MSB)

Status Display

O
N

STATUS

SW1

COMM FAULT

SW2

SW3

ADAPTER

1747-ASB

Cable Tie Slots

SelfLocking Tab

Status Display and LEDs


The Status Display provides alphanumeric status of the 1747-ASB
module and RIO link. When combined with the COMM and FAULT
LEDs, they are very effective troubleshooting tools.

DIP Switches
The 1747-ASB modules three DIP switches allow you to configure
the following items:
Starting Logical Rack Number (Logical Rack) is the
1747-ASB modules starting logical rack number in the scanners
image.
Starting Logical Group Number (Logical Group) is the
1747-ASB modules starting logical group number within the
scanners image.
Baud Rate (Baud Rate) is the 1747-ASB modules RIO link
communication rate. The baud rate must be the same for all
adapters on the RIO link.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

114

Overview

Primary/Complementary SLC Chassis (PRI/COMP)

determines whether the 1747-ASB module appears to the scanner


as a primary or complementary chassis.
Adapter Image Size (IMAGE SIZE) indicates the I/O image
size to be reserved for the adapter. It can be any size between 2
and 32 groups in two logical group increments.
Hold Last State (HLS) determines whether the discrete output
modules are held in their last state when:
RIO link communication with the 1747-ASB module is
lost.
The scanner inhibits the 1747-ASB module.
The scanner sends Reset, Adapter Decide commands to the
1747-ASB module.
Processor Restart Lockout (PRL) determines whether the
1747-ASB module automatically resumes RIO link
communications if communication is lost and then restored.
Link Response Time (RESP) selects restricted or unrestricted
RIO link response time.
Last Chassis/PLC-3 Backup (LAST CHA) When the
1747-ASB module is used with a PLC-2 or PLC-5, this switch
indicates to the scanner that the 1747-ASB module is the last
adapter mapped into the 1747-ASB modules highest logical rack.
When using a PLC-3 processor, the switch determines whether
the 1747-ASB module supports the PLC-3 backup function.
Addressing Mode (ADDR MODE) determines the 1747-ASB
modules remote chassis and remote expansion chassis addressing
mode. 2-slot, 1-slot, and 1/2-slot is available.
Specialty I/O Mode (SP MODE) determines whether the
1747-ASB module discretely maps or block transfer maps
specialty I/O modules in its remote chassis and remote expansion
chassis.
I/O Module Keying (KEY) determines if the 1747-ASB
module saves its current I/O module and DIP switch
configuration to its non-volatile memory, or if the 1747-ASB
module compares the current I/O module and DIP switch
configuration to the one saved in its non-volatile memory.

RIO Link and Processor Restart Lockout Connector


The 6-pin male connector attaches the 1747-ASB module to the RIO
link and processor restart lockout device.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Overview

115

Door Label
The door label provides DIP switch and wiring information.

SelfLocking Tabs
Self-locking tabs secure the module in the rack. No tools are
necessary to install or remove a module.

Cable Tie Slots


Cable tie slots can be used to secure the wiring cable to the module.

Manufacturing Test Plug


This plug is for manufacturing purposes only.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Chapter

Quick Start
for Experienced Users
This chapter helps you to get started using the 1747-ASB module.
We base the procedures here on the assumption that you have an
understanding of PLC and SLC 500 products, as well as the RIO
link. You should understand electronic process control and be able
to interpret the ladder logic instructions required to generate the
electronic signals that control your application.
Because it is a start-up guide for experienced users, this chapter does
not contain detailed explanations about the procedures listed. It
does, however, reference other chapters in this book where you can
get more detailed information.
If you have any questions, or are unfamiliar with the terms used or
concepts presented in the procedural steps, always read the
referenced chapters before trying to apply the information.
This chapter:
tells you what tools and equipment you need
lists preliminary considerations
describes when to address and configure the module
explains how to install and wire the module
discusses system power-up procedures

Required Tools and


Equipment

Have the following tools and equipment ready:


medium blade screwdriver
(2) 1/2 watt terminating resistors (See chapter 5, Installation and
Wiring, for correct size.)
an adequate length of RIO communication cable (Belden 9463)
for your specific application (See chapter 5, Installation and
Wiring, for maximum cable distances.)

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

22

Quick Start for Experienced Users

Procedures
1.

Check the contents of shipping box.

Reference

Unpack the shipping box making sure that the contents include:
Remote I/O adapter module (Catalog Number 1747ASB)
user manual (Publication 17476.13)

If the contents are incomplete, call your local AllenBradley representative for assistance.

2.

Ensure your chassis supports placement of the 1747ASB module.

Check to see that your chassis supports placement of the adapter module by:
reviewing the power requirements of your system (The adapter consumes 600 mA @ 5VDC.)
calculating the total load on the system power supply using the procedure described in appendix B

3.

Choose the type of slot addressing you will use.

Select 1747ASB addressing (i.e., 2slot, 1slot, or 1/2slot). A configuration worksheet is included in
appendix D to assist you in 1747ASB image table addressing.
Important: Due to SLC and PLC addressing differences, when the 1747ASB module is used with
an SLC processor, the image bit numbers are 0-7, 8-15 decimal. When the 1747ASB
module is used with a PLC processor, the image bit numbers are 0-7, 10-17 octal.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Reference
Appendix A
(Specifications)
Appendix B
(Understanding
your
SLC 500/1746
Control System)

Reference
Chapter 3
(Addressing)
Appendix D
(DIP Switch and
Address
Configuration
Worksheets)

Quick Start for Experienced Users

4.

Configure the module using the DIP switches.

Reference

Set the DIP switches (located on the printed circuit board) to the desired setting. A worksheet is
included in appendix D to assist you in DIP switch configuration.

For details, see page 42.

O
N

1
2
3 4 5 6 7

ON
OFF

Logical Rack Number Bit 5 (MSB)


Logical Rack Number Bit 4
Logical Rack Number Bit 3
Logical Rack Number Bit 2
Logical Rack Number Bit 1
Logical Rack Number Bit 0 (LSB)
Logical Group Number Bit 1 (MSB)
Logical Group Number Bit 0 (LSB)

Logical Group Number


7
8
Group
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

0 (default)
2
4
6

Baud Rate

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

57.6K (default)
115.2K
230.4K
INVALID

SW2
Baud Rate
SW2
O
N
1
2
3 4 5 6 7

ON
OFF

Baud Rate Bit 1 (MSB)


Baud Rate Bit 0 (LSB)
Primary/Complementary Chassis
Reserved
ASB Module Image Size Bit 3 (MSB)
ASB Module Image Size Bit 2
ASB Module Image Size Bit 1
ASB Module Image Size Bit 0 (LSB)

Primary/Complementary Chassis
ON = Primary
OFF = Complementary (default)
1747-ASB Module Image Size
For details, see page 49.

SW3
Hold Last State

ON = Hold Last State


OFF = Do Not Hold Last State (default)

SW3
O
N
1
2
3 4 5 6 7

ON
OFF

Chapter 4
(Configuration)
Appendix D
(DIP Switch and
Address
Configuration
Worksheets)

SW1
Logical Rack Number
SW1

23

Hold Last State


Processor Restart Lockout
Link Response
Last Chassis/PLC-3 Backup
Addressing Mode Bit 1 (MSB)
Addressing Mode Bit 0 (LSB)
Specialty I/O Mode
I/O Module Keying

Processor Restart Lockout


ON = Automatic Restart (default)
OFF = Processor Lockout
Link Response
ON = Restricted (default)
OFF = Unrestricted
Last Chassis
ON = Not Last Chassis (default)
OFF = Last Chassis
Addressing Mode
5
6

Address

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

Invalid
1-slot Addressing (default)
1/2-slot Addressing
2-slot Addressing

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

Specialty I/O Mode


ON = Discrete (default)
OFF = Block Transfer
I/O Module Keying
ON = Save Mode (default)
OFF = Check Mode

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

24

Quick Start for Experienced Users

5.

Insert the 1747ASB module into the chassis.

Reference

ATTENTION: Never insert, remove, or wire modules


with power applied to the chassis or devices wired to
the module.

Chapter 5
(Installation and
Wiring)

Make sure system power is off; then insert the adapter module into slot 0 of your 1746 chassis.

Module Release
Card Guide

6.

Connect all RIO link devices.

Reference

Ensure that you:


Daisy chain each RIO link device.
Ground the shield drain wire to the nearest chassis mounting bolt.
Connect the appropriate termination resistors on each end of the link.
Important:

7.

Chapter 5
(Installation and
Wiring)

Do not connect anything to the NC (No Connect) terminal.

(Optional) Wire a processor restart lockout switch.

Reference

ATTENTION: Cycling power on any 1747ASB


module chassis removes the processor restart lockout
condition (SW32) by reinitializing the 1747ASB
module.

Use a momentary switch (Class 1, Division 2) to short terminals IN and RET together.
Important: Do not connect anything to the NC (No Connect) terminal.
Momentary Switch

14 - 24 gauge wire
(maximum 5 feet)

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

LINE 1 (Blue wire)


SHLD (Shield wire)
LINE 2 (Clear wire)
NC (No Connect)
IN
RET

Chapter 5
(Installation and
Wiring)

Quick Start for Experienced Users

8.

Attach the appropriate I/O Module Addressing Labels.

Reference

Attach the Remote PLC or Remote SLC label to the outside bottom of each I/O module in your
1747ASB chassis, as shown below. Fill out each label completely.

INPUT

Chapter 5
(Installation and
Wiring)
Chapter 8
(Application
Examples)

INPUT

0-7
10 - 17
Rack Group(s)
I:
O:
Discrete
BT
Remote PLC System

0-7

8 - 15

Discrete
BT
Remote SLC System

Remote PLC Label

Remote SLC Label

SN Slot
SN Word(s)

0-7
Rack
I:

10 - 17
Group(s)

0-7

8 - 15

SN Slot
SN Word(s)

O:
Discrete
Remote PLC System

BT

BT

9.

25

Discrete

Remote SLC System

If using a PLC processor as a master, attach the octal labels.

The octal filter and door labels must be used when working with a PLC processor as a master.
A list of I/O modules that include an octal label kit can be found on pageNO TAG.
Adhere the octal labels over the existing decimal labels, as shown below.
Decimal Filter Label

Reference
Chapter 5
(Installation and
Wiring)

Octal Filter Label

INPUT

OCTAL

Octal Door Label

1746-XXXX

1746-XXXX (OCTAL)

Decimal Door Label

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

26

Quick Start for Experienced Users

10.

Go through the system startup procedure.

Reference

ATTENTION: Never insert, remove, or wire modules


with power applied to the chassis or devices wired to
the module.

Chapter 6
(StartUp and
Operation)

Follow the steps below:


1. Cycle power one last time in save mode (SW38 ON).
2. Remove power from the system.
3. Remove the 1747ASB module and set SW38 to the OFF position (check mode).
4. Replace the 1747ASB module in slot 0.
5. Apply power to your system.

11.

Check that the module is operating correctly.

Reference

During normal operation (PLC or SLC in Run mode), the 1747ASB module appears as shown
below:

Chapter 7
(Troubleshooting)

ADAPTER
COMM FAULT

Green COMM
LED is on.
Status display
indicates a run
condition.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

STATUS

Chapter 6
(StartUp and
Operation)

Red FAULT
LED is off.

Chapter

Addressing
This chapter presents:
slot numbering
2-slot, 1-slot, and 1/2-slot addressing
how I/O module images are mapped

Chassis Overview

The 1747-ASB module controls 1 remote chassis and up to 2 remote


expansion chassis with a maximum of 30 slots. Currently, there are
four different types of chassis available.
4Slot

Catalog Number 1746A4

10Slot

Catalog Number 1746A10

7Slot

Catalog Number 1746A7

13Slot

Catalog Number 1746A13

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

32

Addressing

The first chassis is referred to as the remote chassis. Up to two


additional chassis, referred to as remote expansion chassis, can be
connected to the remote chassis using a:
6 inch cable, Catalog Number 1746-C7
36 inch cable, Catalog Number 1746-C9
Each remote chassis and remote expansion chassis requires its own
power supply, such as Catalog Numbers 1746-P1, -P2, or -P3.
Important: A 1747-ASB module fault occurs if the remote
expansion chassis are not powered.
Catalog Number 1746C9

36 inch cable
Catalog Number 1746P1

Remote Chassis

Remote Expansion Chassis


Catalog Number 1746P3
Catalog Number 1746C7

Remote Chassis

Catalog Number 1746P2

6 inch
cable

Remote Expansion Chassis


Catalog Number 1746P2

Slot Numbering

The 1747-ASB module is capable of controlling 30 slots. When


expansion chassis are used, the 1747-ASB module treats all of the
I/O modules as if they are installed in a single chassis.
The remote chassis and remote expansion chassis slots are numbered
from 030. The 1747-ASB module must reside in slot 0. Slots
numbered 31 and above cannot be used.
Important: Installing modules in slots 31 and above causes a
1747-ASB module error.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

10 11 12

13

14 15 16 17 18 19

20 21 22 23 24 25

26 27 28 29 30

not not
used used

Addressing

Addressing I/O Modules

33

SLC and PLC processors address the I/O modules residing in the
1747-ASB module chassis by logical rack and logical group. Before
using the 1747-ASB module, you should first understand slot
addressing and how each modules image is mapped into the
1747-ASB modules image.
Slot addressing refers to how each chassis slot is assigned a specific
amount of the 1747-ASB module image. The amount depends on
which type of slot addressing you choose; 2-slot, 1-slot, and 1/2-slot
addressing is available, as shown below:
Important: Due to SLC and PLC addressing differences, when the
1747-ASB module is used with an SLC processor, the
image bit numbers are 07, 815 decimal. When the
1747-ASB module is used with a PLC processor, the
image bit numbers are 07, 1017 octal.

2Slot
Addressing

Two slots are addressed as one logical group.


Input Image

Slot 2

Output Image

Slot 1

1Slot
Addressing

Slot 2

Slot 1

One slot is addressed as one logical group.


Input Image

Output Image

Slot 1

1/2Slot
Addressing

Slot 1

One slot is addressed as two logical groups.


Input Image

Output Image

Slot 1

Slot 1

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

34

Addressing

2Slot Addressing
When the 1747-ASB module is configured for 2-slot addressing, the
processor addresses two chassis slots as one logical group. Each
slot, beginning with slot 1, is sequentially assigned one byte (8 bits)
of the 1747-ASB modules input and output image. Each terminal
on a discrete I/O module installed in a slot is assigned a bit within
the byte, beginning with the least significant bit. 2-slot addressing is
designed to accommodate I/O modules whose image size is one byte
or less.
Slot 1 is assigned to the low byte of the first logical
group of the 1747ASB module's image, beginning
with bit 0 (the LSB).

Slot 1

Input Image
17
15 14 13 12 11 10

10 7
8 7

Output Image
5

0
0

Octal
Decimal

17
15 14 13 12 11 10

10 7
8 7

0
0

group 0

Octal
Decimal
group 0

Slot 1

Slot 1

Each terminal is assigned a bit,


beginning with the least significant bit.

Each terminal is assigned a bit,


beginning with the least significant bit.

Slot 2 is assigned to the high byte of the first


logical group of the 1747ASB module's
image, beginning with bit 8 decimal, 10 octal.

Slot 2
Input Image
17
15 14 13 12 11 10

10 7
8 7

Output Image
5

0
0

Octal
Decimal

17
15 14 13 12 11 10

group 0
Slot 2
Each terminal is assigned a bit,
beginning with the least significant bit.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

10 7
8 7

0
0

Octal
Decimal
group 0

Slot 2
Each terminal is assigned a bit,
beginning with the least significant bit.

Addressing

35

To accommodate modules that require up to one word (16 bits) of


input and/or output image, the 1747-ASB module pairs slots
beginning with slot 1 (i.e., slot 1 is paired to slot 2, etc.). Slot
pairing combines the low and high byte into a one word input and
output image. This maximizes I/O image space, allowing you to
install an input module in one slot and an output module in the other,
each using up to 16 bits of the paired input and output images.
I

Slot 1
Paired

When a module is installed in slot 1 that requires one word of


input image, slot 1 uses the input image normally assigned to
slots 1 and 2. Slot 2, therefore, cannot use any of its input
image. However, slot 2 can now use the output image
normally assigned to slots 1 and 2, because slot 1 is not
using its portion of the output image.

Input Image
17
15 14 13 12 11 10

I = Input Module
O = Output Module

10 7
8 7

0
0

Octal
Decimal
Group 0

Slot Pair
I

Slot 2
Paired

Slot 1

Slot 1

When a module is installed in slot 2 that requires one word of


output image, slot 2 uses the output image normally
assigned to slots 1 and 2 (if slot 1 is not already using it).
The lesser slot number has priority over the greater.

Output Image
17
15 14 13 12 11 10

10 7
8 7

0
0

Octal
Decimal
Group 0

Slot 2

Slot 2

2Slot Addressing Considerations


When the 1747-ASB module is configured for 2-slot addressing, you
can use 4, 8, 16 point, combination, and specialty I/O modules.
If it is necessary to use 16 point modules, like modules (i.e., two
input modules) cannot be installed as a pair. This is because each 16
point module uses a full word in the image. For this reason you must
pair an input with an output module. 32 point modules cannot be
used.
If the discrete mode is selected, specialty I/O modules with one word
or less of input and output image are discretely mapped such as the
1747-KE. Specialty I/O modules with two or more words of input or
output image are block transfer mapped.
If block transfer mode is selected, all specialty I/O modules are block
transfer mapped regardless of their image size.
The 1747-ASB module can block transfer map a maximum of eight
words.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

36

Addressing

2Slot Addressing Examples


The following example illustrates how to map modules requiring:
one byte or less of input or output image
one word of input or output image
I

I = Input Module
O = Output Module

1746 Slot Numbering

Slot Pair

1 2

10

In this example, the modules require one byte of input


or output image.
Input modules do not have to be paired with output
modules because, in the example to the right, only one
byte of input or output image is required.
To use image space more efficiently, slot pairing can be
used with 16 point I/O module as shown below or
complementary I/O can be used. Refer to page 4-5.

17
15

10
8

Slot 2
Slot 4
Slot 6
Slot 8
Slot 10
Slot 12
Slot 14
Slot 16
Slot 18

7
7

11 12

13

0
0

1747ASB Input Image

Modules Requiring One Byte

14 15 16

17

18

1747ASB Output Image


Octal
Decimal

17
15

Slot 1
Slot 3
Slot 5
Slot 7
Slot 9
Slot 11
Slot 13
Slot 15
Slot 17

10
8

7
7

Slot 2
Slot 4
Slot 6
Slot 8
Slot 10
Slot 12
Slot 14
Slot 16
Slot 18

0
0

Slot 1
Slot 3
Slot 5
Slot 7
Slot 9
Slot 11
Slot 13
Slot 15
Slot 17

Octal
Decimal

Slot Pair 1
Slot Pair 2
Slot Pair 3
Slot Pair 4
Slot Pair 5
Slot Pair 6
Slot Pair 7
Slot Pair 8
Slot Pair 9

= unused
1747ASB Input Image

Modules Requiring One Word


In this example, the modules require one word of input
or output image.
Input modules must be paired with output modules to
ensure the paired modules do not use the same image
locations.

17
15

10
8

Slot 1
Slot 3
Slot 5
Slot 7
Slot 9
Slot 11
Slot 13
Slot 15
Slot 17

7
7

0
0

Slot 1
Slot 3
Slot 5
Slot 7
Slot 9
Slot 11
Slot 13
Slot 15
Slot 17

1747ASB Output Image


Octal
Decimal

17
15

10
8

Slot 2
Slot 4
Slot 6
Slot 8
Slot 10
Slot 12
Slot 14
Slot 16
Slot 18

7
7

0
0

Slot 2
Slot 4
Slot 6
Slot 8
Slot 10
Slot 12
Slot 14
Slot 16
Slot 18

Octal
Decimal

Slot Pair 1
Slot Pair 2
Slot Pair 3
Slot Pair 4
Slot Pair 5
Slot Pair 6
Slot Pair 7
Slot Pair 8
Slot Pair 9

If images overlap, a 1747-ASB module error occurs. For example, if


16 point input modules are installed in slots 1 and 2, their input
images overlap and a 1747-ASB module error occurs.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Addressing

37

1Slot Addressing
When the 1747-ASB module is configured for 1-slot addressing, the
processor addresses one chassis slot as one logical group. Each slot,
beginning with slot one, is sequentially assigned one word (16 bits)
of the 1747-ASB modules input and output image. Each terminal
on the I/O module is assigned a bit within the word, beginning with
the least significant bit. 1-slot addressing is primarily designed to
accommodate I/O modules whose image size is less than or equal to
one word but more than one byte.
Slot 1 is assigned to the first logical group of the 1747ASB
module's image, beginning with bit 0 (the LSB).

Slot 1

Input Image
17
15 14 13 12 11 10

10 7
8 7

Output Image
5

0
0

Octal
Decimal
group 0

17
15 14 13 12 11 10

Slot 1

10 7
8 7

0
0

Octal
Decimal
group 0

0
0

Octal
Decimal
group 1

Slot 1

Each terminal is assigned a bit,


beginning with the least significant bit.

Each terminal is assigned a bit,


beginning with the least significant bit.

Slot 2 is assigned the next logical group of the 1747ASB


module's image, beginning with bit 0 (the LSB).

Slot 2
Input Image
17
15 14 13 12 11 10

10 7
8 7

Output Image
5

Slot 2
Each terminal is assigned a bit,
beginning with the least significant bit.

0
0

Octal
Decimal
group 1

17
15 14 13 12 11 10

10 7
8 7

Slot 2
Each terminal is assigned a bit,
beginning with the least significant bit.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

38

Addressing

To accommodate modules that require up to two words (32 bits) of


input and/or output image, the 1747-ASB module pairs slots
beginning with slot 1 (i.e., slot 1 paired to slot 2, etc.). Slot pairing
combines both words (of either the input or output image, whichever
is required) and assigns them to one slot. This maximizes I/O image
space, allowing you to install an input module in one slot and an
output module in the other, each using up to 32 bits of the paired
input and output images.
I

When a module is installed in slot 1 that requires both


words of input image, slot 1 uses the input image normally
assigned to slot 2. Slot 2, therefore, cannot use any of its
input image. However, slot 2 can now use the output
image normally assigned to slot 1, because slot 1 is not
using it.
Input Image

Slot 1
Paired

17
15 14 13 12 11 10

10 7
8 7

0
0

Group 0

Slot 1
I = Input Module
O = Output Module

Octal
Decimal
Group 1

Slot Pair
I

When a module is installed in slot 2 that requires both


words of output image, slot 2 uses the output image
normally assigned to slot 1 (if slot 1 is not already using
it). The lesser slot number has priority over the greater.

Slot 2
Paired

Output Image
17
15 14 13 12 11 10

Slot 2

10 7
8 7

0
0

Octal
Decimal
Group 0
Group 1

1Slot Addressing Considerations


When the 1747-ASB module is configured for 1-slot addressing, you
can use 4, 8, 16 point, 32 point discrete and discrete combination,
discrete and block transfer specialty I/O modules.
Like 32 point modules (i.e., two input modules) cannot be installed
as a pair because both slots cannot use the same image location. For
example, if you use a 32 point input module that requires two words
of the image, the other module within the pair must be an output
module.
If the discrete mode is selected, specialty I/O modules with two
words or less of input and output image are discretely mapped such
as the 1746-NIO4I. However, with a combination specialty module
such as the 1746-NIO4I, the adjacent slot must be empty. Specialty
I/O modules with more than two words of input or output image are
block transfer mapped such as the 1746-NI4, -NO4I, -NO4V, and
-HS.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Addressing

39

If the block transfer mode is selected, all specialty I/O modules are
block transfer mapped regardless of their image size.
The 1747-ASB module can block transfer map a maximum of eight
words.
1Slot Addressing Examples
The following example illustrates how to map modules requiring:
one word of input or output image
more than one word of input or output image
I

I = Input Module
O = Output Module

1746 Slot Numbering

Slot Pair

I
O

10

11 12

13

14

15 16

17 18

Modules Requiring One Word

Modules Requiring More Than One Word

In the example below, the modules require one word of input or output image.

In the example below, the modules require more than one word of input
or output image.

Input modules do not have to be paired with output modules, because, in this
example, only one word of input and output image is required.
To reduce unused image space, slot pairing can be used with 32 point I/O
modules or the system can be configured for complementary I/O. For more
information, refer to the complementary I/O description found on page 4-5.
1747ASB Input Image
17
15

10
8

Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
Slot 10
Slot 11
Slot 12
Slot 13
Slot 14
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 17
Slot 18

7
7

1747ASB Output Image


Octal
Decimal

0
0

Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
Slot 10
Slot 11
Slot 12
Slot 13
Slot 14
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 17
Slot 18

Input modules must be paired with output modules so their input and
output images do not overlap.

1
2
3
4
5 Slot Pair
6
7
8
9

17
15

Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
Slot 10
Slot 11
Slot 12
Slot 13
Slot 14
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 17
Slot 18

10
8

7
7

Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
Slot 10
Slot 11
Slot 12
Slot 13
Slot 14
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 17
Slot 18

1747ASB Input Image


Octal
Decimal

0
0

17
15

1
2
3
4
5 Slot Pair
6
7
8
9

10
8

Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 3
Slot 3
Slot 5
Slot 5
Slot 7
Slot 7
Slot 9
Slot 9
Slot 11
Slot 11
Slot 13
Slot 13
Slot 15
Slot 15
Slot 17
Slot 17

7
7

1747ASB Output Image


Octal
Decimal

0
0

Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 3
Slot 3
Slot 5
Slot 5
Slot 7
Slot 7
Slot 9
Slot 9
Slot 11
Slot 11
Slot 13
Slot 13
Slot 15
Slot 15
Slot 17
Slot 17

17
15

1
2
3
4
5 Slot Pair
6
7
8
9

10
8

Slot 2
Slot 2
Slot 4
Slot 4
Slot 6
Slot 6
Slot 8
Slot 8
Slot 10
Slot 10
Slot 12
Slot 12
Slot 14
Slot 14
Slot 16
Slot 16
Slot 18
Slot 18

7
7

Octal
Decimal

0
0

Slot 2
Slot 2
Slot 4
Slot 4
Slot 6
Slot 6
Slot 8
Slot 8
Slot 10
Slot 10
Slot 12
Slot 12
Slot 14
Slot 14
Slot 16
Slot 16
Slot 18
Slot 18

1
2
3
4
5 Slot Pair
6
7
8
9

= unused

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

310

Addressing

If images overlap, a 1747-ASB module error occurs. For example, if


32 point input modules are installed in slots 1 and 2, their input
images overlap and a 1747-ASB module error occurs.

1/2Slot Addressing
When the 1747-ASB module is configured for 1/2-slot addressing,
the processor addresses one chassis slot as two logical groups. Each
slot, beginning with slot one, is sequentially assigned two words (32
bits) of the 1747-ASB modules input and output image. Each
terminal on the I/O module is assigned a bit within the word,
beginning with the least significant bit. 1/2 addressing is designed to
accommodate I/O modules whose image size is less than or equal to
two words but more than one word.
Slot 1

Slot 1 is assigned to the first two logical groups of the


1747ASB module's image, beginning with bit 0 (the LSB).
Input Image
17
15 14 13 12 11 10

10 7
8 7

Output Image
5

0
0

Octal
Decimal
group 0

Slot 1

group 1

17
15 14 13 12 11 10

10 7
8 7

0
0

Octal
Decimal
Group 0

Slot 1

Group 1

Each terminal is assigned a bit,


beginning with the least significant bit.

Slot 2

Each terminal is assigned a bit,


beginning with the least significant bit.

Slot 2 is assigned to the next two logical groups of the


1747ASB module's image, beginning with bit 0 (the LSB).
Input Image
17
15 14 13 12 11 10

10 7
8 7

Output Image
5

0
0

Octal
Decimal
group 2

Slot 2

group 3
Each terminal is assigned a bit,
beginning with the least significant bit.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

17
15 14 13 12 11 10

10 7
8 7

0
0

Octal
Decimal
Group 2

Slot 2

Group 3
Each terminal is assigned a bit,
beginning with the least significant bit.

Addressing

311

To accommodate modules that require up to four words of input


and/or output image, the 1747-ASB module pairs slots beginning
with slot one (i.e., slot 1 is paired to slot 2, etc.). Slot pairing
combines the two words assigned to each slot (of either the input or
output image, whichever is required) and assigns all four words to
one slot. This maximizes I/O image space, allowing you to install an
input module in one slot and an output module in the other, each
using up to four words of the paired input and output images.
I

Slot 1
Paired

With slot pairing, when a module is installed in slot 1 that requires all four
words of the input image, slot 1 uses the input image normally assigned to
slot 2. Slot 2, therefore, cannot use any of its input image. However, slot 2
can now use the output image normally assigned to slot 1, because slot 1
is not using it.

Input Image
17
15 14 13 12 11 10

10 7
8 7

0
0

Octal
Decimal
Group 0
Group 1

Slot 1
I = Input Module
O = Output Module

Group 3

Slot Pair
I

Slot 2
Paired

Group 2

When a module is installed in slot 2 that requires all four words of the output
image, slot 2 uses the output image normally assigned to slot 1 (if slot 1 is
not already using it). The lesser slot number has priority over the greater.

Output Image
17
15 14 13 12 11 10

10 7
8 7

0
0

Octal
Decimal
Group 0

Slot 2

Group 1
Group 2
Group 3

1/2Slot Addressing Considerations


When the 1747-ASB module is configured for 1/2-slot addressing,
you can use 4, 8, 16, 32 point, discrete combination and specialty I/O
modules in any slot.
If the discrete mode is selected, specialty modules with four words or
less of input or output image are discretely mapped such as the
1746-NI4, -NO4I, -NO4V, and -HS. However, with a specialty
module such as the 1746-HS, the adjacent slot must be empty.
Specialty modules with more than four words of input or output
image are block transfer mapped such as the 1746-BAS.
If the block transfer mode is selected, all specialty modules are block
transfer mapped regardless of the image size.
The 1747-ASB module can block transfer map a maximum of eight
words.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

312

Addressing

1/2Slot Addressing Examples


The following example illustrates how to map modules requiring:
two words of input or output image
more than two words of input or output image
I

1746 Slot Numbering

Slot Pair

1 2

I
O

I = Input Module
O = Output Module

Modules Requiring Two Words

Modules Requiring More Than Two Words

In the example below, the modules require two words of input or output
image.

In this example, the modules require more than two words of input or output
image.

If you would like to know how you can use the unused input or output
images, refer to the complementary I/O description, found on page 4-5.

Input modules must be paired with output modules so their input or output
images do not overlap.

1747ASB Input Image


17
15

10
8

Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 8

7
7

1747ASB Output Image


Octal
Decimal

0
0

Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 8

2
Slot Pair
3

17
15

10
8

Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 8

7
7

0
0

Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 8

1747ASB Input Image


Octal
Decimal

2
Slot Pair
3

= unused

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

17

10

15

Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 3
Slot 3
Slot 3
Slot 3
Slot 5
Slot 5
Slot 5
Slot 5
Slot 7
Slot 7
Slot 7
Slot 7

Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 3
Slot 3
Slot 3
Slot 3
Slot 5
Slot 5
Slot 5
Slot 5
Slot 7
Slot 7
Slot 7
Slot 7

1747ASB Output Image


Octal
Decimal

2
Slot Pair
3

17

10

15

Slot 2
Slot 2
Slot 2
Slot 2
Slot 4
Slot 4
Slot 4
Slot 4
Slot 6
Slot 6
Slot 6
Slot 6
Slot 8
Slot 8
Slot 8
Slot 8

Slot 2
Slot 2
Slot 2
Slot 2
Slot 4
Slot 4
Slot 4
Slot 4
Slot 6
Slot 6
Slot 6
Slot 6
Slot 8
Slot 8
Slot 8
Slot 8

Octal
Decimal

2
Slot Pair
3

Addressing

How I/O Module Images Are


Mapped

313

The method of transferring an I/O modules image to the 1747-ASB


modules image is referred to as image mapping, or mapping. An
I/O image can be discretely mapped or block transfer mapped. How
the modules image is mapped depends on the type of module you
are using (discrete or specialty I/O).
The following table lists all of the different types of I/O modules
currently supported by the 1747-ASB module.
I/O Module
4 point discrete I/O
8 point discrete I/O
16 point discrete I/O
32 point discrete I/O
Combination discrete I/O
Analog I/O
BASIC Module
IMC 110 Servo Motion Control Module
Distributed I/O Scanner Module
Direct Communications Module
KE Communications Module
Thermocouple/mV Module
RTD/Resistance Module
Stepper Controller Module

Type of Module
Discrete
Discrete
Discrete
Discrete
Discrete
Specialty
Specialty
Specialty
Specialty
Specialty
Specialty
Specialty
Specialty
Specialty

How Discrete I/O Modules Are Mapped


Discrete I/O images are exchanged with either the SLC or PLC
scanner using RIO discrete transfers. Discrete I/O module images
are always discretely mapped to the 1747-ASB module image.
Discrete I/O images are mapped into the assigned image space
beginning with the least significant bit. The example below assumes
1-slot addressing starting at logical group zero.
Backplane transfer from a
4 point discrete input module to
the 1747ASB module image.

Processor/Scanner

RIO discrete
transfer from the
1747ASB
module image to
the scanner
image.

PLC Local Chassis

Processor

SLC Local Chassis

1747ASB Module Input Image


15 14 13 12 11 10

slot 1

group 0

slot 2

group 1

slot 3

group 2

slot 4

group 3
group 4

slot 5
slot 6

Scanner

0 1 1 0

group 5

4 Point Input
Module Data

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

314

Addressing

How Specialty I/O Module Images Are Mapped


Specialty I/O module images are discretely mapped or block transfer
mapped, depending on the specialty I/O mode you have selected for
the 1747-ASB module. SW3-7 provides two specialty I/O modes,
discrete and block transfer.
When Block Transfer Mode is Selected
The advantage of using block transfer mode is that it only requires
one byte of the 1747-ASB modules input and output image.
However, you must add block transfer instructions to your PLC user
program, and block transfer times are generally longer than discrete
transfer times.
When block transfer mode is selected, all specialty modules that are
block transfer mapped use one byte in the 1747-ASB modules input
and output image. These bytes reside in the least significant byte of
the 1747-ASB image reserved for the modules slot.
When a module is block transfer mapped, the modules input and
output image is transferred on the RIO link using RIO block
transfers. RIO block transfers are processed by the scanner and
1747-ASB module. The 1747-ASB module transfers the specialty
I/O modules image by way of a backplane scan. The 1747-ASB
module then transfers the image to the scanner using RIO block
transfers.
The scanner and 1747-ASB module process a maximum of one RIO
block transfer per logical device per RIO scan. If you wish to
perform four RIO block transfers for a logical device, at least four
RIO scans are required to complete these RIO block transfers.
The 1747-ASB module can block transfer up to a maximum of 8
words per block transfer.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Addressing

315

1747ASB module exchanges data with


the speciality I/O module via the
backplane.
The PLC scanner and
1747ASB module
exchange
the specialty I/O module's
data using RIO block
transfers.

PLC Local Chassis

1747ASB module is
configured for 1slot
addressing.
1

1747ASB Module Input Image

Processor/Scanner

1747ASB Module Output Image

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

slot 1
slot 2
slot 3
slot 4
slot 5
slot 6

slot 1
slot 2
slot 3
slot 4
slot 5
slot 6
Block Transfer Byte

Block Transfer Byte

The byte reserved in the


1747ASB module's output and
input image is used by the
scanner and 1747ASB module to
process the RIO block transfer.

The 1747-ASB module processes RIO block transfers that are less
than or equal to the specialty I/O modules image size. For
example, if a four word specialty I/O module is block transfer
mapped, the 1747-ASB module accepts RIO block transfer reads for
this module if they are less than or equal to four words. RIO block
transfers always begin reading or writing word 0 (least significant
word) of the modules image.
An RIO block transfer size of zero will cause all of the modules
image to be transferred.
When Discrete Mode is Selected
The advantage of discrete mode is that no programming is required
for data transfer. However, discrete mode requires more 1747-ASB
module image space than block transfer mode.
When discrete mode is selected, specialty I/O modules are discretely
mapped or block transfer mapped, depending on:
the specialty I/O modules image size
the addressing mode selected (2-slot, 1-slot, or 1/2-slot)
When discrete mode is selected, a specialty I/O module is discretely
mapped if its image fits into the image space assigned to its slot pair.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

316

Addressing

For example, if the specialty I/O module such as the 1746-NIO4I and
-NIO4V requires two words of input and output image, and the
1747-ASB module is configured for 1-slot addressing, the specialty
I/O module is discretely mapped . However, if four words of input
or output image are required, the specialty I/O module such as the
1746-NI4, -NO4V, -NO4I, and -HS, are block transfer mapped.
RIO Discrete Mapping
Two words of input and output image
are required by the specialty I/O
module. The 1747ASB module is
configured for 1slot addressing, which
provides two words of input and output
image per slot pair. Because the
specialty I/O module's image can be
mapped into the provided image, the
specialty I/O module is discretely
mapped. The other slot of the pair is
empty since all of the input and output
image is used.

Two words provided by


1747ASB module.

Two words required


by specialty I/O module.

RIO Block Transfer Mapping


Four words of input and output image
are required by the specialty I/O module.
The 1747ASB module is configured for
1slot addressing, which provides two
words of input and output image per slot
pair. Because the specialty I/O module's
image cannot be mapped into the
provided image, the specialty I/O module
is block transfer mapped.
Two words provided by
1747ASB module.

Four words required


by specialty I/O module.

Due to the modules image size, some specialty I/O modules are
always block transfer mapped.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Addressing

317

The following table provides the specialty I/O module mapping used
when discrete mode is selected.
Max. Specialty I/O
Module Image Size
1 Word

2 Words

3 or 4 Words

5 to 8 Words

Addressing Mode

Specialty I/O
Module Mapping

2slot

Discrete

1slot

Discrete

1/2slot

Discrete

2slot

Block transfer

1slot

Discrete

1/2slot

Discrete

2slot

Block transfer

1slot

Block transfer

1/2slot

Discrete

2slot

Block transfer

1slot

Block transfer

1/2slot

Block transfer

I/O Module
Examples
1747KE

1746NIO4I,
-NIO4V

1746NI4,
1746NI4
NO4V,
IMC110
IMC110
1746BAS,
1746
BAS,
NR4, NT4,
HSTP1
1747DCM

The 1747-ASB module can block transfer map a maximum of eight


words.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Chapter

Configuration
This chapter presents the configuration options made through the
various DIP switch settings.

DIP Switch Information

The 1747-ASB module parameters are configured by three DIP


switches, shown below. To assist you in the configuration of
multiple 1747-ASB modules, a configuration worksheet is provided
in appendix D.
SelfLocking Tab

DIP Switches

O
N

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FRN

IMPORTANT:
SLC 500
INSTALL IN SLOT ZERO OF MODULAR CHASSIS ONLY
REMOTE I/O ADAPTER MODULE
CURRENT REQUIREMENT: 375mA
SER
OPERATING
LISTED IND. CONT. EQ.
UL FOR HAZ. LOC. A196 SA TEMPERATURE

O
N

CAT

O
N

SERIAL NO.

SW1

SW2

SW3

CLASS 1, GROUPS A, B, C AND D, DIV. 2

CODE T3C

FAC 1M

MADE IN USA

SW3

SW2

SW1

Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup


Addressing Mode Bit 1 (MSB)
Addressing Mode Bit 0 (LSB)
Specialty I/O Mode
I/O Module Keying

Baud Rate Bit 1 (MSB)


Baud Rate Bit 0 (LSB)
Primary/Complementary SLC Chassis
Reserved
ASB Module Image Size Bit 3 (MSB)
ASB Module Image Size Bit 2
ASB Module Image Size Bit 1
ASB Module Image Size Bit 0 (LSB)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Link Response

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Processor Restart Lockout

O
N

O
N

O
N

Hold Last State

Logical Rack Number Bit 5 (MSB)


Logical Rack Number Bit 4
Logical Rack Number Bit 3
Logical Rack Number Bit 2
Logical Rack Number Bit 1
Logical Rack Number Bit 0 (LSB)
Logical Group Number Bit 1 (MSB)
Logical Group Number Bit 0 (LSB)

ON
OFF

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

42

Configuration

O
N

DIP Switch SW1

1
2
3 4 5 6 7

SW1

Logical Rack Number (SW11 through 6)

Logical Rack Number

SW1 switches 1 through 6 assign the 1747-ASB module a starting


logical rack number in the scanners image.

Logical Group Number

O
N
1
2
3 4 5 6 7

SW2

When configured as a complementary chassis (SW2 switch 3), the


1747-ASB module can appear on the RIO link as any starting logical
rack between 0 and 62 (0 to 76 octal).

Baud Rate
Primary/Complementary Chassis
Reserved
ASB Module Image Size

8
O
N

When configured as a primary chassis (SW2 switch 3), the


1747-ASB module can appear on the RIO link as any starting logical
rack between 0 and 7.

1
2
3 4 5 6 7

SW3

Hold Last State


Processor Restart Lockout
Link Response
Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup
Addressing Mode

Logical rack one is the default setting as shipped from the factory.

Specialty I/O Mode


I/O Module Keying

ON
OFF

The following table provides the logical rack numbers for PLC
processors.
Logical Rack Number (Octal)

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Switch Number (SW1)

1747
SN

PLC
2

PLC
3

PLC
5/15

PLC
5/25

PLC
5/40

PLC
5/60

PLC
5/250

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

10

10

10

10

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

11

11

11

11

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

12

12

12

12

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

13

13

13

13

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

14

14

14

14

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

15

15

15

15

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

16

16

16

16

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

17

17

17

17

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

20

20

20

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

21

21

21

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

22

22

22

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

23

23

23

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

24

24

24

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

25

25

25

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

26

26

26

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

27

27

27

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

30

30

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

31

31

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

Configuration

1747
SN

PLC
2

PLC
3

PLC
5/15

PLC
5/25

PLC
5/40

PLC
5/60

PLC
5/250

32

32

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

33

33

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

34

34

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

35

35

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

36

36

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

37

37

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

40

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

41

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

42

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

43

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

44

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

45

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

46

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

47

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

50

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

51

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

52

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

53

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

54

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

55

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

56

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

57

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

60

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

61

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

62

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

63

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

64

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

65

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

66

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

67

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

70

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

71

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

72

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

73

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

74

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

75

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

76
77

77

43

77

77

77

77

77

77

Reserved

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

44

Configuration

Logical Group Number (SW17,8)


O
N

SW1 switches 7 and 8 determine the starting logical group.

1
2
3 4 5 6 7

SW1

Logical Rack Number

Logical Group Number

O
N
1
2

Baud Rate

3 4 5 6 7

SW2

Primary/Complementary Chassis
Reserved
ASB Module Image Size

Valid starting logical group numbers are determined by the:


addressing mode (2-slot, 1-slot, or 1/2-slot)
specialty I/O mode (discrete or block transfer)
The default position is logical group zero as shipped from the
factory.

Specialty I/O Mode

Valid Starting Logical Groups

2slot, 1slot, 1/2slot

Block Transfer

0, 2, 4, 6

2slot, 1slot

Discrete

0, 2, 4, 6

1/2slot

Discrete

0, 4

O
N

Addressing Mode

1
2
3 4 5 6 7

SW3

Hold Last State


Processor Restart Lockout
Link Response
Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup
Addressing Mode

Specialty I/O Mode


I/O Module Keying

ON
OFF

Logical Group Number DIP Switch Settings


SW1

SW1

SW1

SW1
O
N

O
N

O
N

O
N

11

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

7
8

Group 0

Group 2

Group 4

Group 6

If an invalid starting logical group number is selected, an error


occurs.

DIP Switch SW2


Baud Rate (SW21,2)
SW2 switches 1 and 2 determine the baud rate the 1747-ASB
module operates at while communicating across the RIO link.
The default is 57.6K as shipped from the factory.
Baud Rate

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Maximum Cable Distance (Belden 9463)

57.6K baud

3048 meters (10,000 feet)

115.2K baud

1524 meters (5,000 feet)

230.4K baud

762 meters (2,500 feet)

Configuration

45

Baud Rate DIP Switch Settings


SW2

SW2

1
2

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

230.4K

O
N

115.2K

SW2

O
N

O
N

O
N

57.6K

SW2

Invalid

If the invalid switch setting is selected, a 1747-ASB module error


occurs.

O
N

Primary/Complementary Chassis (SW23)

1
2
3 4 5 6 7

SW1

Logical Rack Number

Logical Group Number

SW2 switch 3 determines whether the 1747-ASB module appears to


the scanner as a primary or complementary chassis.
Primary/Complementary SLC Chassis DIP Switch Settings

O
N

SW2

7
8

2
3 4 5 6 7
8

ON
OFF

3 4 5 6

Specialty I/O Mode


I/O Module Keying

O
N

Addressing Mode

Primary

3 4 5 6

SW3

Hold Last State


Processor Restart Lockout
Link Response
Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup

O
N

ASB Module Image Size

3 4 5 6 7

SW2

Primary/Complementary Chassis
Reserved

O
N

Baud Rate

SW2

Complementary

If you are not using complementary I/O, all 1747-ASB modules


should be configured as complementary chassis. If a primary chassis
is configured and no complementary chassis exists, the scanner
wastes time trying to scan a complementary chassis that is not there.
Complementary I/O allows two 1747-ASB modules to overlap their
input and output images, creating one image within the scanner, thus
maximizing image space. The combined image is located where the
primary image is configured to reside. Complementary I/O is very
useful when portions of your input and output images are unused.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

46

Configuration

ATTENTION: Because the primary and


complementary chassis images overlap, input and
specialty I/O modules must never share the same image
location. Inputs received by the scanner may be
incorrect and RIO block transfers are not serviced
properly.
If an output module shares its output image with
another output module, both output modules receive
the same output information.

If you want to use complementary I/O, two 1747-ASB modules


are required. One 1747-ASB module is configured as a primary
chassis, the other as a complementary chassis. If a primary chassis
exists, it is scanned first.
The 1747-ASB modules in the primary and complementary chassis
must be configured to have the same:
addressing mode, using SW3-5,6
logical group number, using SW1-7,8
baud rate, using SW2-1,2
image size, using SW2-5 through 8

ATTENTION: If the addressing mode, logical group


number, baud rate, and image size are not the same,
unpredictable operation of both 1747-ASB modules
results. No 1747-ASB module errors occur.

The 1747-ASB modules in the primary and complementary chassis


do not have to be configured to have the same:
hold last state selection
processor restart lockout selection
specialty I/O mode
I/O module keying mode
link response selection
In addition, the 1747-ASB modules do not have to have to be
controlling the same number of slots or type of chassis.
Important: If a 1747-ASB module is configured as a primary
chassis and as the last chassis, a 1747-ASB module
error occurs. Only complementary chassis can be
configured as last chassis. For information concerning
last chassis selection, refer to page 419.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Configuration

47

Primary and complementary chassis cannot have the same logical


rack number. The logical rack numbers must be assigned to the
primary and complementary racks as shown below:
Primary Chassis
Logical Rack Number

Complementary Chassis Logical Rack Number


Decimal

Octal

108

118

10

128

11

138

12

148

13

158

14

168

15

178

If a 1747ASB module is configured as a primary chassis with a logical rack number greater than
7, a 1747ASB module error occurs.

ATTENTION: If the logical rack numbers are not


properly assigned, unpredictable operation of both
1747-ASB modules results. No 1747-ASB module
errors occur.

Important: Some processors and/or scanners have configuration


limitations when using complementary I/O in the
addressing modes. Refer to the appropriate PLC or
scanner manual for more information.
The following example illustrates how I/O modules requiring two
words of the input or output image can leave unused image space.
Complementary I/O allows two chassis to overlap their input and
output images, creating one image within the scanner.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

48

Configuration

O I

Slot

O I

Slot Pair

O I

O I

I = Input Module
O = Output Module

Slot

10
8

7
7

2
Slot Pair

17
15

10
8

Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 8

7
7

Input Image
from Complementary Chassis
Octal
Decimal

0
0

Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 8

17
15

10
8

7
7

Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 8

2
Slot Pair

Octal
Decimal

0
0

Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 8

2
Slot Pair

= unused
image
space

Scanner's I/O Image


Both images are overlapped in the
scanner. The overlapped image
appears where the primary chassis
image is configured to reside.
In this case, the primary chassis
image is configured as starting
logical rack 0 and starting logical
group 0.

Complementary Chassis I/O Image

Output Image
from Primary Chassis

Octal
Decimal

0
0

Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 8

Complementary Chassis Configured As:


Logical Rack Number 8 (decimal)
Logical Group Number 0
Image Size (logical groups) 16
Addressing Mode 1/2slot
Primary/Complementary Complementary

Primary Chassis I/O Image

Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 8

I O I O I

Complementary Chassis

0
0
16
1/2slot
Primary

Input Image
from Primary Chassis
17
15

Slot Pair

Primary Chassis
Primary Chassis Configured As:
Logical Rack Number
Logical Group Number
Image Size (logical groups)
Addressing Mode
Primary/Complementary

Input Image
17
15

Logical
Rack 0

Logical
Rack 1

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

10
8

Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 8

7
7

Output Image
Octal
Decimal

0
0

Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 8

2
Slot Pair

17
15

10
8

Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 8

7
7

Octal
Decimal

0
0

Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 8

2
Slot Pair

Output Image
from Complementary Chassis
17
15

10
8

Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 8

7
7

Octal
Decimal

0
0

Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 8

2
Slot Pair

Configuration

49

O
N

Reserved (SW24)

1
2
3 4 5 6 7

SW1

Logical Rack Number

Logical Group Number

SW2 switch 4 must remain in the ON position.


Reserved DIP Switch Setting
SW2
O
N

O
N

ASB Module Image Size

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6 7

SW2

Primary/Complementary Chassis
Reserved

Baud Rate

Reserved
O
N
1
2
3 4 5 6 7

SW3

Hold Last State


Processor Restart Lockout
Link Response
Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup
Addressing Mode

Specialty I/O Mode


I/O Module Keying

ON
OFF

ASB Module Image Size (SW25, 6, 7, 8)


SW2 switches 5 through 8 determine the size of the 1747-ASB
modules image that is reserved in the scanner.
You must also make sure you do not exceed the maximum logical
rack number, described on page 411.
Image size selection examples are found on page 412.
Examples of odd size chassis/images are provided, starting on
page 413.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

410

Configuration

O
N

The 1747-ASB module image size can be between 2 and 32 logical


groups, in 2 logical group increments.

1
2
3 4 5 6 7

SW1

Logical Rack Number

ASB Module Image Size DIP Switch Settings

Logical Group Number

SW2

SW2

SW2

SW2
O
N

O
N

O
N

O
N

O
N
1
2
3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6 7

ASB Module Image Size

SW2

Primary/Complementary Chassis
Reserved

Baud Rate

Number of Logical Groups

SW2

SW2

SW2

SW2

O
N

1
2

Addressing Mode

O
N
1
2
3 4 5 6 7
8

12

14

16

SW2

SW2

SW2

SW2
O
N

O
N

O
N

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

18

20

22

24

SW2

SW2

SW2

SW2

1
2

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

30

28

O
N

26

O
N

O
N

O
N

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

10

O
N

Number of Logical Groups

3 4 5 6 7

3 4 5 6 7

Number of Logical Groups

3 4 5 6 7

Number of Logical Groups

ON
OFF

O
N

O
N

Specialty I/O Mode


I/O Module Keying

O
N

3 4 5 6 7

SW3

Hold Last State


Processor Restart Lockout
Link Response
Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup

32

Configuration

411

Important: If after assigning your 1747-ASB module image size,


you exceed logical rack 62 in complementary mode
(SW2 switch 3) or logical rack 7 in primary mode
(SW2 switch 3), an error occurs. When assigning the
starting logical rack and group numbers, make sure the
size of the 1747-ASB module image does not exceed
the maximum logical rack number, as shown below:

Complementary Mode

Bit Number (Octal)


Bit Number (Decimal)

17

10 7

15

8 7

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2

Logical
Rack 59

Logical
Rack 60

Logical
Rack 61

Logical
Rack 62

Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3

If you have selected logical


rack 60, group 0 as your
starting address, the largest
1747ASB module image size
you can create is 24 groups (3
logical racks). Assigning a
larger 1747ASB module
image size exceeds the
maximum logical rack number.

Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

Bit Number (Octal)


Bit Number (Decimal)

Primary Mode

17

10 7

15

8 7

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2

Logical
Rack 4

Logical
Rack 5

Logical
Rack 6

Logical
Rack 7

Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2

If you have selected logical


rack 5, group 0 as your
starting address, the largest
1747ASB module image size
you can create is 24 groups (3
logical racks). Assigning a
larger 1747ASB module
image size exceeds the
maximum logical rack number.

Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

412

Configuration

O
N

The following examples illustrate how the selection of the


1747-ASB image size is determined by:
the addressing mode (2-slot, 1-slot, 1/2-slot)
the number of chassis slots required

1
2
3 4 5 6 7

SW1

Logical Rack Number

Logical Group Number

1747ASB Module
O
N
1
2

Baud Rate

1Slot Addressing With Six Slots Available

3 4 5 6 7

SW2

Primary/Complementary Chassis
Reserved
ASB Module Image Size

Using 1slot addressing and a 7slot chassis, six


slots are available for I/O modules. To map all
six slots into the scanner image, the 1747ASB
module image size must be 6 logical groups.
0

1 2

6
Group 5

10

Group 8,9

Group 10,11

Group 12,13

Group 14,15

Group 16,17

Group 18,19

4
Group 6,7

5
Group 4

4
Group 3

3 4 5 6 7

Group 1

Group 0

SW3

3
Group 2

O
N

Slot Number
Hold Last State
Processor Restart Lockout
Link Response
Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup

Addressing Mode
Specialty I/O Mode
I/O Module Keying

ON
OFF

1/2Slot Addressing With Ten Slots Available

1747-ASB Module

Using 1/2slot addressing and a 4slot chassis


attached to a 7slot chassis, ten slots are
available for I/O modules. To map all ten slots
into the scanner image, the 1747ASB module
image size must be 20 logical groups.

3
Group 4,5

Group 2,3

Slot Number

Group 0,1

If an image size of 16 logical groups is


chosen, slots 9 and 10 are unused. If an I/O
module is installed in slots 9 or 10, the
1747ASB module ignores it unless the I/O
module faults.

2Slot Addressing With Nine Slots Available


Using 2slot addressing and a 10slot chassis,
nine slots are available for I/O modules.

1747ASB Module

4 Logical Groups

Selecting 4 logical groups leaves slot 9 unused.


If an I/O module is in slot 9, the 1747ASB
module ignores it, unless the I/O module faults.
Selecting 6 logical groups leaves an unused
logical group in the 1747ASB module image.
The image normally assigned to slot 10 can be
used by slot 9 (providing one full word).

Slot Number

Group 3

Group 2

Group 1

Group 0
1747ASB Module

6 Logical Groups

Slot Number

Group 5

Group 4

Group 3

Group 2

Group 1

Group 0

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Configuration

Special Image and Chassis


Size Considerations

413

Sometimes, logical slots and groups are not mapped due to chassis
size and selected image size because:
There is not enough 1747-ASB module image to map all of the
available slots.
The 1747-ASB image size exceeds requirements for available
slots.
One slot of a pair is present, with 1747-ASB module image
available for both slots.
Both slots of a pair are available, but there is only enough
1747-ASB module image space available for one slot.

Not Enough 1747ASB Module Image to Map All of the Available


Slots
When there is not enough 1747-ASB module image to map all of the
available slots, any I/O modules in the unassigned slots are ignored.
If one of the unassigned I/O modules fault, it triggers a 1747-ASB
module fault.
Modules should not be installed above slot 30. Otherwise a
1747-ASB error occurs.
In the following example, a 7-slot chassis contains a 1747-ASB
module with an image size of 4 logical groups using 1-slot
addressing.
1747-ASB Module

Using 1slot addressing and a 7slot chassis, six slots are


available for I/O modules. Because the image size is 4 logical
groups, 2 slots are not used. Slots 5 and 6 are ignored, even if
I/O modules are installed in them. However, If one of the
modules in slots 5 or 6 faults, a 1747ASB module error occurs.
1

Group 1

Group 2

Group 3

Not Used

Not Used

Group 0

Slot Number

4 Logical Groups

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

414

Configuration

1747ASB Image Size Exceeds Slot Requirements


When there are not enough slots available to use the entire
1747-ASB module image, output image data received by the
1747-ASB module for the extra slots is ignored. All input image
data sent to the scanner for the extra slots is zero.
1747ASB Module

Group 7
Group 6

Group 5

Group 4

Group 3

1 2

Not Used
Not Used

Group 2

Slot Number

Group 1
Group 0

Using 1slot addressing and a 7slot chassis, six


slots are available for I/O modules. Because the
image size is 8 logical groups, 2 logical groups are
not used. When there are not enough slots
available to use the entire 1747ASB module
image, output image data received by the
1747ASB module for the extra slots is ignored. All
input image data sent to the scanner for the extra
slots is zero.

8 Logical Groups

One Slot of Pair is Present, and 1747ASB Module Image is


Available for Both Slots
When one slot of a pair is present and 1747-ASB module image is
available for both slots, the single slot can use the extra image space.
1747ASB module

3
Group 3

Group 0

Group 2

Slot Number

Group 1

Using 1slot addressing and a 4slot chassis, three


slots are available for I/O modules. Because the
image size is 4 logical groups, 1 logical group is not
assigned to a slot. Since slot 4 is not present, the
module in slot 3 can use both logical groups assigned
to the slot pair. This could be done by installing a 32
point input module in slot 3.

4 Logical Groups

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Configuration

415

Both Slots Of A Pair Are Available But There Is Only Enough


1747ASB Module Image Space Available For One Slot
This condition only occurs in 1/2-slot addressing.
When both slots of a pair are available but there is only enough
1747-ASB module image space available for one slot, the lower
numbered slot uses the available image space. If a four word
specialty module (i.e., 1746-NI4) is installed in this slot and the
1747-ASB module is configured for the discrete specialty mode, a
1747-ASB error occurs.
1747ASB Module

Using 1/2slot addressing and a 7slot chassis, six


slots are available for I/O modules. Because the
image size is 6 logical groups, the last two logical
groups of the image can only be used by slot 3 (slots
4, 5, and 6 are ignored unless the module faults).
1

Group 2, 3

Group 4, 5

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

Group 0, 1

Slot Number

6 Logical Groups

DIP Switch SW3


Hold Last State (SW31)
SW3 switch 1 allows discrete outputs to remain in their last state
when certain, but not all, system faults occur.
Hold Last State DIP Switch Settings
SW3

SW3

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

O
N

O
N

Hold Last State

Do Not Hold Last State

ATTENTION: If switch 1 is set to the ON position,


outputs connected to this chassis remain in their last
state when a fault occurs and machine motion may
continue after fault detection. We recommend that you
set switch 1 to the OFF position to de-energize outputs
wired to this chassis when a fault is detected.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

416

Configuration

When hold last state is selected, outputs are held in their last state
when any of the following conditions occur:
RIO link communications is lost due to a broken cable or scanner
fault.
The 1747-ASB module is inhibited by the scanner.
The 1747-ASB module receives reset, adapter decide commands
from the scanner.
When the discrete outputs are being held in their last state, consider
the following:
The specialty modules operate as if they are being controlled by
an SLC processor that is in the test mode. See the specialty I/O
modules manual to determine the response to this condition.
The specialty I/O modules inputs are still read by the 1747-ASB
module. However, the specialty I/O modules outputs are not
modified by the 1747-ASB module.
Your system must be designed so it is in a safe state when all discrete
outputs are off, or cleared.
The 1747-ASB module is shipped from the factory with the hold last
state switch in the OFF position (do not hold last state).

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

ATTENTION: When hold last state is selected and


specialty I/O modules are being used, the operation of
the specialty I/O modules must be considered when the
discrete outputs are being held in their last state.

Configuration

417

O
N

Processor Restart Lockout (SW32)

1
2
3 4 5 6 7

SW1

Logical Rack Number

Logical Group Number

O
N
1
2

Baud Rate

3 4 5 6 7

SW2

Primary/Complementary Chassis
Reserved

SW3 switch 2 determines whether your system automatically


resumes RIO link communications with the scanner when:
Link communications are temporarily interrupted. For example,
by removing and replacing the RIO connector.
The 1747-ASB module is inhibited and re-enabled.
Processor Restart Lockout DIP Switch Settings

ASB Module Image Size

SW3

SW3
O
N

O
N

3 4 5 6
7

3 4 5 6 7

3 4 5 6

2
8

ON
OFF

Addressing Mode
Specialty I/O Mode
I/O Module Keying

O
N

SW3

Hold Last State


Processor Restart Lockout
Link Response
Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup

Automatically Restart

Lock Processor Out

While in the OFF position (lock processor out) and communications


are restored, the 1747-ASB module does not respond to any
communication commands until 1747-ASB module terminals IN and
RET are momentarily shorted together. Processor restart lockout
prevents RIO link communications (by locking out the scanner and
processor) and does not allow the 1747-ASB module to exchange
any I/O data or respond to any RIO commands, such as reset adapter
reset commands.
RIO link communications can be restarted by:
momentarily shorting pins 5 and 6 together (See chapter 5 for
wiring information.)
cycling power on any chassis controlled by the 1747-ASB
module
While in the ON position, the 1747-ASB module always attempts to
restart communications with the scanner if RIO link
communications are interrupted or if the 1747-ASB module is
inhibited and re-enabled.
While in the ON position, the 1747-ASB module does not respond if
terminals 5 and 6 are shorted together.
The 1747-ASB module is shipped from the factory with the default
position ON (automatic restart).

ATTENTION: Cycling power on any chassis


removes the processor restart lockout condition.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

418

Configuration

Important: After communications to all of the 1747-ASB modules


logical devices are established, selecting processor
restart lockout disables PLC auto configurations on the
1747-ASB module.
If the 1747-ASB module has not received communications for all of
its logical devices, you are able to perform PLC auto configurations
once the 1747-ASB module is powered up. If processor restart
lockout is not selected, you are able to perform PLC auto
configurations on the 1747-ASB module.
Important: Selecting processor restart lockout affects the
1747-ASB module inhibit functionality. See page C5
of this manual for more information.
Link Response Time (SW33)
SW3 switch 3 allows you to select a longer (restricted) response time
when communicating at 57.6K and 115.2K baud. 230.4K baud
operates with a short (unrestricted) response time, regardless of the
switch setting.
The link response time is the time it takes an adapter to respond to
data received from the scanner. Some scanners require a longer
response time than other scanners. Operating unrestricted reduces
overall RIO scan time, but requires a faster scanner.
Link Response Time DIP Switch Settings
SW3

SW3
O
N

O
N

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

Restricted

Unrestricted

The 1747-ASB module is shipped from the factory with the default
position ON (restricted).
The following table lists the scanners that require restricted
operation.
Catalog Number

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Description

1775S4A, S4B

I/O scannerprogrammer interface module for PLC3

1775SR, SR5

Remote scanner/distribution panel for PLC 3/10

Configuration

419

O
N

Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup (SW34)

1
2

SW3 switch 4 is used for last chassis selection when the 1747-ASB
module is connected to a PLC-2, PLC-5, or SLC scanner (Catalog
Number 1747-SN). When connected to a PLC-3, it selects the
Processor Backup function. Refer to the PLC-3 user manual for a
description of Processor Backup.

3 4 5 6 7

SW1

Logical Rack Number

Logical Group Number

O
N
1
2

Baud Rate

3 4 5 6 7

SW2

Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup DIP Switch Settings

Primary/Complementary Chassis
Reserved
ASB Module Image Size

SW3

SW3
O
N

O
N

O
N

3 4 5 6
8

Specialty I/O Mode


I/O Module Keying

Addressing Mode

3 4 5 6 7

3 4 5 6

SW3

Hold Last State


Processor Restart Lockout
Link Response
Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup

Not Last Chassis

Last Chassis

ON
OFF

The 1747-ASB module is shipped from the factory with the default
position ON (not last chassis).
A 1747-ASB module should be configured as the last chassis when:
Its image crosses logical rack boundaries and no other adapter
uses a higher group number within its last logical rack.
It uses a portion of a logical rack and no other adapter uses a
higher group number within that logical rack.
The following examples illustrate last chassis conditions.
Bit Number (Octal)
Bit Number (Decimal)

17
15

Scanner Image
10 7

8 7

Bit Number (Octal)


Bit Number (Decimal)

Group 0

Logical
Rack 0

Logical
Rack 1

Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

Group 0

1747ASB Module 1

Logical
Rack 0

Last Chassis

1747ASB Module 2

Logical
Rack 1

Group 0
Group 1

Logical
Rack 2

Logical
Rack 3

Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2

17
15

Scanner Image
10 7

8 7

1747ASB Module 1
1747ASB Module 2

Not Last Chassis

1747ASB Module 3

Not Last Chassis


Last Chassis

Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1

Not Last Chassis


1747ASB Module 3

Logical
Rack 2

Last Chassis
1747ASB Module 4

Last Chassis

Logical
Rack 3

Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

420

Configuration

Important: When using complementary I/O, do not configure a


primary chassis as the last chassis, otherwise a
1747-ASB module error occurs.
Addressing Mode (SW35,6)
SW3 switches 5 and 6 determine the addressing mode of
2-slot, 1-slot, or 1/2-slot.
Addressing Mode DIP Switch Settings
SW3

SW3

SW3
O
N

O
N

O
N

O
N

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

1slot

1/2slot

2slot

SW3

Invalid

The 1747-ASB module is shipped from the factory with the default
position selected for 1-slot addressing.
If the invalid switch setting is selected, a 1747-ASB module error
occurs.
1/2-slot addressing is not supported by the PLC-2 family of
processors.
Specialty I/O Mode (SW37)
SW3 switch 7 determines the specialty I/O mode (discrete or block
transfer).
Specialty I/O Mode DIP Switch Settings
SW3

SW3
O
N

O
N

3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

Discrete

Block Transfer

The 1747-ASB module is shipped from the factory with the default
position ON (discrete).
For an overview of discrete and block transfer modes, refer to
page 313.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Configuration

421

O
N

I/O Module Keying (SW38)

1
2
3 4 5 6 7

SW1

Logical Rack Number

Logical Group Number

SW3 switch 8 provides I/O module keying, that prevents you from
operating the 1747-ASB module when the I/O module or DIP switch
configuration (other than the keying DIP switch itself) differs from
the last time you saved it. There are two modes, save and check.

O
N
1
2

Baud Rate

3 4 5 6 7

SW2

Primary/Complementary Chassis
Reserved
ASB Module Image Size

When power is applied in save mode and the DIP switch and I/O
module configurations are valid, the 1747-ASB module saves the
DIP switch and I/O module configuration in non-volatile memory.

8
O
N
1
2
3 4 5 6 7

SW3

Hold Last State


Processor Restart Lockout
Link Response
Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup
Addressing Mode

Specialty I/O Mode


I/O Module Keying

ON
OFF

When power is applied in check mode, the 1747-ASB module


compares the stored DIP switch and I/O module configuration to the
current DIP switch and I/O module configuration. If the
configurations do not match, a 1747-ASB module error occurs.
Important: Use save mode during setup and debug. After
debugging is complete, power up in save mode one last
time. Remove power and place the 1747-ASB module
in check mode prior to normal operation.
I/O Module Keying DIP Switch Settings
SW3

SW3
O
N

O
N

3 4 5 6 7

3 4 5 6 7

Save Mode

Check Mode

The 1747-ASB module is shipped from the factory with the default
position ON (save mode).

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

422

Configuration

Switch Setting Summary

The following is a summary listing the various DIP switch settings.

SW1
SW1
O
N

Logical Rack Number

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Logical Rack Number Bit 5 (MSB)


Logical Rack Number Bit 4
Logical Rack Number Bit 3
Logical Rack Number Bit 2
Logical Rack Number Bit 1
Logical Rack Number Bit 0 (LSB)
Logical Group Number Bit 1 (MSB)
Logical Group Number Bit 0 (LSB)

For details, see page 42.

Logical Group Number


7

Group

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

0 (default)
2
4
6

SW2

SW2
O
N

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Baud Rate Bit 1 (MSB)


Baud Rate Bit 0 (LSB)
Primary/Complementary Chassis
Reserved
ASB Module Image Size Bit 3 (MSB)
ASB Module Image Size Bit 2
ASB Module Image Size Bit 1
ASB Module Image Size Bit 0 (LSB)

Baud Rate
1

Baud Rate

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

57.6K (default)
115.2K
230.4K
INVALID

Primary/Complementary
Chassis
ON = Primary
OFF = Complementary
(default)

1747-ASB Module Image


Size
For details, see page 49.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Configuration

423

SW3

SW3
O
N

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Hold Last State


Processor Restart Lockout
Link Response
Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup
Addressing Mode Bit 1 (MSB)
Addressing Mode Bit 0 (LSB)
Specialty I/O Mode
I/O Module Keying

Hold Last State


ON = Hold Last State
OFF = Do Not Hold Last State (default)

Processor Restart Lockout


ON = Automatic Restart (default)
OFF = Processor Lockout

Link Response
ON = Restricted (default)
OFF = Unrestricted

Last Chassis
ON = Not Last Chassis (default)
OFF = Last Chassis

Addressing Mode
5

Address

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

Invalid
1slot Addressing (default)
1/2slot Addressing
2slot Addressing

Specialty I/O Mode


ON = Discrete (default)
OFF = Block Transfer

I/O Module Keying


ON = Save Mode (default)
OFF = Check Mode

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Chapter

Installation and Wiring


This chapter presents installation and wiring information for the
remote I/O adapter module. For information concerning chassis
installation and I/O modules, refer to appendix B.

European Union Directive


Compliance

If this product is installed within the European Union or EEA


regions and has the CE mark, the following regulations apply.

EMC Directive
This apparatus is tested to meet Council Directive 89/336
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) using a technical construction
file and the following standards, in whole or in part:
EN 50081-2 EMC Generic Emission Standard, Part 2
Industrial Environment
EN 50082-2 EMC Generic Immunity Standard, Part 2
Industrial Environment
The product described in this manual is intended for use in an
industrial environment.

Installing the 1747ASB


Module

Use the following steps to install the 1747-ASB module in a remote


chassis.

ATTENTION: Disconnect power before attempting


to install or remove the module.

1. Install the module in slot 0 of the remote chassis by aligning the


circuit board with the chassis card guide.
The 1747-ASB module must only be installed in slot 0 (the left
slot) of the remote chassis. Do not install the 1747-ASB module
in the remote expansion chassis.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

52

Installation and Wiring

2. Slide the module into the chassis until the top and bottom tabs
lock into place. To remove the module, press and hold the release
located on each self-locking tab and slide the module out.
3. Cover all unused slots with the Card Slot Filler, Catalog Number
1746-N2.

Module Release
Card Guide

Link Wiring

The modules are connected in a daisy chain configuration on any


RIO link. A daisy chain network is formed by connecting network
devices together in a serial manner using Belden 9463 cable. Belden
9463 cable is the only approved cable for Allen-Bradley RIO links.
The total number of adapters allowed on the RIO link are:
32 if the scanner and all adapters on the RIO link have extended
node capability
16 if the scanner or any adapter does not have extended node
capability
Refer to page 19 for information on extended node capability.
There are no restrictions governing the spacing between the devices,
as long as the maximum cable distance is not exceeded. Refer to the
table below for baud rate and maximum cable distances.
Baud Rate
57.6K baud
115.2K baud
230.4K baud

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Maximum Cable Distance


3048 meters (10,000 feet)
1525 meters (5,000 feet)
750 meters (2,500 feet)

Installation and Wiring

53

Important: No two devices can be connected to the same point on


the link. An example of correct and incorrect link
wiring is shown below.

Correct Link Wiring

1747ASB Module

To Scanner
1747ASB Module

1747ASB Module

Incorrect Link Wiring

1747ASB Module

To Scanner
1747ASB Module

1747ASB Module

This is an incorrect connection!

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

54

Installation and Wiring

Link Termination
A 6-pin keyed connector provides a quick connection to the RIO link
and processor restart lockout switch. A user-supplied terminating
resistor must be attached across line one and two of the connector at
each end of the RIO link. The size of the resistor depends on the
baud rate and whether the scanner and all adapters have extended
node capability, as shown in the table below. The cable shield must
be connected to chassis ground only at one end of the RIO link.
Baud Rate
Using Extended
Node Capability
Not Using
Extended
e ded Node
ode
C bili
Capability

Resistor Size

All Baud Rates

82W 1/2 Watt

57.6K baud
115.2K baud

150W 1/2 Watt


150W 1/2 Watt

230.4K baud

82W 1/2 Watt

Important: If the signal integrity on the RIO link is compromised


by environmental noise, improper termination, and/or
improper cable installation, the 1747-ASB module scan
rate drops. This is indicated by a pronounced flickering
of the status display.
To Scanner's
Connector

Terminating Resistor
LINE 1 (Blue wire)
SHLD (Shield wire)
LINE 2 (Clear wire)
NC (No Connect)
IN
RET

Chassis Ground

Status Display
ADAPTER
COMM FAULT

STATUS
1

(MSB)

2
7
8

LOGICAL
GROUP

4 5 6

(LSB)

SW1

LOGICAL
RACK

O
N
PRI/COMP

RSV
(MSB)

4 5 6
7 8

IMAGE
SIZE
(LSB)

BAUD
RATE

LINE 1
SHLD
LINE 2
NC
IN
RET

SW2

Blue
Shield
Clear

O
N
8

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

ADDR
MODE
SP MODE
KEY

Important: Do not connect anything to the NC (No Connect)


terminal.

LAST CHA

4 5 6

SW3
1747-ASB

HLS
PRL
RESP

1 2 3

Terminating Resistor

Installation and Wiring

Wiring a Processor Restart


Lockout Switch

55

When processor restart lockout is enabled (SW3-2) and


communications are restored, the 1747-ASB module does not
respond to any type of communications, or communication
commands until terminals IN and RET are momentarily shorted
together. This occurs while the RIO scanner is attempting to
communicate with the 1747-ASB module.

ATTENTION: Cycling power on any 1747-ASB


module chassis removes the processor restart lockout
condition by re-initializing the 1747-ASB module.

You must use a momentary switch (Class 1, Division 2) to short the


terminals together. The processor restart lockout is removed as soon
as the switch toggles back to the open circuit position.
A maximum of five feet of 1424 gauge wire (solid or stranded) is
recommended to connect the switch to the terminal.
ADAPTER
COMM FAULT

STATUS
1

(MSB)

2
7
8

LOGICAL
GROUP

4 5 6

(LSB)

SW1

LOGICAL
RACK

O
N
BAUD
RATE
PRI/COMP

RSV
(MSB)

4 5 6
7 8

IMAGE
SIZE
(LSB)

LINE 1
SHLD
LINE 2
NC
IN
RET

SW2

O
N

LINE 1 (Blue wire)


SHLD (Shield wire)
LINE 2 (Clear wire)
NC (No Connect)
IN
RET

Momentary Switch

LAST CHA

4 5 6

SW3

ADDR
MODE
SP MODE

Important: Do not connect anything to the NC (No Connect)


terminal.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

KEY

1747-ASB

HLS
PRL
RESP

1 2 3

14 - 24 gauge wire

56

Installation and Wiring

I/O Module Addressing Labels

Due to the 1747-ASB modules addressing modes and RIO link


operation, the I/O modules controlled by the 1747-ASB module are
addressed by the PLC processor on a logical rack, logical group basis
and by the SLC processor on a 1747-SN scanner slot and word basis.
A remote PLC and SLC label kit is included with each 1747-ASB
module to assist you in addressing your I/O modules.
Use the labels that correspond to the type of master you are using
(PLC or SLC). Attach the Remote PLC or SLC label to the outside
bottom of each I/O module in your 1747-ASB chassis. Fill out each
label completely. RIO address label examples are provided on
pages 85 and 814 (SLC), and 823 (PLC).
Important: When the 1747-ASB module is used with PLC
processors, use octal labels with discrete 1746 I/O
modules that have 16 or more points. (See page 57.)
INPUT

0-7

INPUT

10 - 17
Rack

0-7

Group(s)

SN Slot

I:

SN Word(s)

O:
Discrete

BT

8 - 15

BT

Remote PLC System

Discrete

Remote SLC System

Remote PLC Label

Remote SLC Label

0-7
Rack

10 - 17
Group(s)

I:
O:
BT

0-7

8 - 15

SN Slot
SN Word(s)

Discrete

Remote PLC System

BT

Discrete

Remote SLC System

Using a PLC as a Master


If you are using a PLC processor as a master, each I/O module is
addressed by logical rack and logical group, regardless of what
physical slot it is in.

Using an SLC as a Master


If you are using an SLC processor as a master, each I/O module is
addressed by the physical slot number of the 1747-SN scanner and
the word that the I/O module uses in the scanner image. Data is
transferred on the network by logical rack and logical group number.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Installation and Wiring

Octal Label Kit Installation

57

The octal filter and door label must be used when working with a
PLC processor as a master. An octal label kit is included with the
I/O modules listed in the table on the following page. The kits can
also be obtained through your Allen-Bradley distributor.
Applying the Octal Filter Label
1. Remove the octal filter label from its paper carrier.
2. Align the octal filter label numbers horizontally to the module
color bar and over the decimal filter numbers, as shown in the
illustration below.
3. Apply the octal label to the filter.
4. Press firmly to ensure proper adhesion of the label.
Applying the Octal Door Label
1. Remove the octal door label from its paper carrier.
2. Align it over the decimal door label on the inside of the door.
3. Press firmly to ensure proper adhesion of the label.

Module Color Bar

Decimal Filter Label

Octal Filter Label

INPUT

OCTAL

Octal Door Label

1746-XXXX

1746-XXXX (OCTAL)

Decimal Door Label

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

58

Installation and Wiring

Octal Kit and I/O Module Information


Octal Kit Catalog
Number 1746

Applies to I/O

Module 1746

RL40

IA16

RL41

IB16

RL42

IG16

RL43

IM16

RL44

IN16

RL45

IV16

RL46

ITB16

RL47

ITV16

RL50

OA16

RL51

OB16

RL52

OG16

RL53

OV16

RL54

OW16

RL55

OBP16

RL56

OVP16

RL57

OAP12

RL58

IC16

RL59

IH16

RL60

IB32

RL61

IV32

RL70

OB32

RL71

OV32

Kit available with series C I/O modules.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Chapter

StartUp and Operation


This chapter guides you through:
system start-up
powerup and initialization sequences
initial link communications
normal operation
communication exceptions
remote expansion chassis power loss
invalid RIO link transfers
testing the 1747-ASB module

System StartUp

Make sure SW3-8 is ON (save mode) while you setup and debug
your system. When you have completed debugging your system:
1. Cycle the power one last time in save mode (SW3-8 ON).
2. Remove power from the system.
3. Remove the 1747-ASB module and set SW3-8 to the OFF
position (check mode).
4. Replace the 1747-ASB module in slot 0.
5. Apply power to your system.
Any future changes to the 1747-ASB modules DIP switch or I/O
module configuration results in a 1747-ASB module error, as long as
the 1747-ASB module is in check mode.

Powerup and Initialization


Sequences

The powerup and initialization sequence depends on whether the


1747-ASB module is in the save or check mode (SW3-8). RIO
communications do not commence until a powerup and initialization
sequence is complete.
Power must be applied to all of the remote chassis and remote
expansion chassis controlled by the 1747-ASB module before this
sequence can be completed. If the remote expansion chassis are not
powered, a 1747-ASB module error occurs.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

62

Start-Up and Operation

Save Mode
When power is applied in save mode, the 1747-ASB module:
1. Performs power up diagnostics
2. Reads and verifies the actual DIP switch and I/O module
configuration
3. Saves the DIP switch and I/O module configuration
4. Waits for RIO link communications from the scanner

Check Mode
When power is applied in check mode, the 1747-ASB module:
1. Performs power up diagnostics
2. Verifies the stored configuration integrity
3. Compares the actual DIP switch, I/O module and chassis
configurations to the stored configurations
4. Waits for RIO link communications from the scanner
1747-ASB module errors found during powerup and initialization are
noted in chapter 7.

Normal Operation

After successfully completing a powerup and initialization sequence,


the 1747-ASB module waits to receive RIO link communications
from the scanner for all of its logical devices. Once the 1747-ASB
module receives RIO link communication for all of its logical
devices, it begins normal operation.
During normal operation (PLC or SLC in Run mode), the 1747-ASB
module appears as shown below:

ADAPTER
COMM

Red FAULT LED is off.

Green COMM LED is on.


STATUS

Status display
indicates a run
condition.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

FAULT

Start-Up and Operation

Communication Exceptions

63

A communication exception is not an error because once the


exception is corrected, the 1747-ASB module begins normal
operation without the need to cycle remote chassis or remote
expansion chassis power. Communication exceptions are conditions
that prevent normal RIO link communications. They may even be
purposely used to change the operating state of the 1747-ASB
module.
If a communication exception exists with one logical device under
the 1747-ASB modules control, the 1747-ASB module treats all
logical devices under its control as if they too have the same
condition. For example, if one logical device is inhibited, the
1747-ASB module treats all of its logical devices as if they too were
inhibited.
Communication exceptions can only occur after the 1747-ASB
module has first received communications from the scanner for all of
its logical devices.
If the 1747-ASB module is more than one logical device, more than
one communication exception may be present at the same time. If
this occurs, they are handled on a priority basis.
Priority

Condition

Loss of RIO link communications

Inhibits

Reset, adapter reset commands

Reset, adapter decide commands

Therefore, if one of the 1747-ASB modules logical devices is


receiving reset adapter decide commands and another is inhibited,
the 1747-ASB module treats all of its logical devices under its
control as if they too were inhibited. Once the inhibit condition is
cleared, the module treats all of its logical devices as if they were
receiving reset adapter decide commands.

Inhibit Condition
When any of the 1747-ASB modules logical devices are inhibited
before communication with all of its logical devices occur one time:
The inhibited logical devices do not communicate on the RIO
link.
The enabled logical devices communicate on the RIO link.
The 1747-ASB module does not send output data to any of its
output modules, even those that are enabled.
The 1747-ASB module does not process any RIO block transfer
writes.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

64

Start-Up and Operation

The 1747-ASB module sends new input data from its input
modules to the scanner for enabled devices.
The 1747-ASB module processes RIO block transfers reads for
enabled devices.
The position of the processor restart lockout switch (PRL) affects the
1747-ASB modules inhibit functionality. If processor restart
lockout is selected, and any logical device assigned to the 1747-ASB
module is inhibited after all of the logical devices have received RIO
link communications from the scanner at least once:
All of the 1747-ASB modules logical devices stop
communicating on the RIO link.
The 1747-ASB module does not send any output data to any of its
output modules.
Discrete outputs are held in their last state if hold last state is
selected, or discrete outputs are reset if hold last state is not
selected.
The 1747-ASB module does not process any RIO block transfers.
If processor restart lockout is not selected and any logical device
assigned to the 1747-ASB module is inhibited after all of the logical
devices have received RIO link communications from the scanner at
least once:
The inhibited logical devices stop communicating on the RIO
link.
The enabled logical devices continue to communicate on the RIO
link.
The 1747-ASB module does not send new output data to any
logical device output module, even those that are enabled.
Discrete outputs are held in their last state if hold last state is
selected, or discrete outputs are reset if hold last state is not
selected.
The 1747-ASB module does not process any RIO block transfer
writes.
The 1747-ASB module sends new input data from its input
modules to the scanner for enabled logical devices.
The 1747-ASB module processes RIO block transfer reads for
enabled logical devices.
Important: Reset, adapter reset and reset, adapter decide commands
are always ignored by the 1747-ASB module when any
of its logical devices are inhibited.
See page 72 for information regarding status codes.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Start-Up and Operation

65

The following table provides specific information concerning how


the inputs and outputs are handled during normal operation and when
communication exceptions occur. Notice that the hold last state
setting makes a difference in the control of the discrete outputs and
how the specialty I/O modules may operate.
1747ASB
1747
ASB Condition

Specialty I/O Module


Outputs
SLC State

Discrete
Outputs

All
Inputs

Waiting for communications after powerup

Not updated

Test

Cleared

Read

Normal running

Changing

Run

Changing

Read

Not updated

Run

Hold last state

Read

Test

Cleared

Read

Hold last state


selected

1747ASB module
inhibited
Loss of communications
Reset adapter decide

Hold last state


selected or
not selected

1747ASB module
inhibited
Loss of communications

Not updated

Reset adapter decide

Updated

Reset adapter reset commands received

Updated

Test

Cleared

Read

Major error

Not updated

Program/Fault

Cleared

Not read

Minor error

Not updated

Program/Fault

Cleared

Not read

Expansion chassis power loss

Not updated

Program/Fault

Cleared

Not read

This is the 1747ASB module's operating mode, as compared to an SLC processor. For example,
if the SLC state is TEST, the 1747ASB module is controlling the specialty I/O modules in the
same manner as an SLC processor would in the test mode. Refer to the appropriate SLC
specialty I/O user's manual for more information.
After the 1747ASB module enters the Run mode.
Before the 1747ASB module enters the Run mode.
This type of error is usually associated with the 1747ASB module. Refer to chapter 7 for more
information.
This type of error is usually associated with a configuration error. Refer to chapter 7 for more
information.

Remote Expansion Chassis


Power Loss

Invalid RIO Link Transfers

If power to any remote expansion chassis is lost, a 1747-ASB


module error occurs. When power to the remote expansion chassis is
restored, the 1747-ASB module acts as if its own chassis power was
cycled and resets itself, restoring normal operation unless a major
fault occurred.

The 1747-ASB module assigns each slot in the remote chassis and
remote expansion chassis a fixed amount of its image using slot
addressing. The 1747-ASB module then maps the I/O modules
images to the portion of the 1747-ASB image that is assigned to their
slots.
If the I/O module in any slot is block transfer mapped, the 1747-ASB
module expects data for that I/O module to be transferred on the RIO
link using RIO block transfers. If the I/O module in any slot is
discretely mapped, the 1747-ASB expects data for that I/O module to
be transferred on the RIO link using RIO discrete transfers.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

66

Start-Up and Operation

An Invalid RIO link transfer occurs when the 1747-ASB module


receives data for a slot in a manner other than that for which the
1747-ASB module is expecting to receive data for that slot.
Invalid RIO link transfers are categorized below. Errors are not
generated by these conditions:
RIO discrete or block transfers to empty or nonexistent slots
RIO discrete transfers to block transfer slots
RIO block transfers to discrete slots
invalid length RIO block transfers

RIO Discrete or Block Transfers To Empty or Nonexistent


Chassis Slots
Discrete output image data received by the 1747-ASB module or
RIO block transfers to empty or nonexistent slots are ignored by the
1747-ASB module.
Discrete input image data sent by the 1747-ASB module for empty
or nonexistent slots are all zeros.

RIO Discrete Transfers To Block Transfer Chassis Slots


Discrete output image data received by the 1747-ASB module for a
block transfer slot is ignored by the 1747-ASB module.
Discrete input image data from the 1747-ASB module for block
transfer slots may be non-zero.

RIO Block Transfers To Discrete Chassis Slots


RIO block transfers to the 1747-ASB module for discrete slots are
ignored by the 1747-ASB module.
Important: Performing an RIO block transfer to a discrete chassis
slot which has an output module in it may cause outputs
on that module to turn on.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Start-Up and Operation

67

Invalid Length RIO Block Transfers


An invalid length RIO block transfer occurs when:
1. An RIO block transfer to an I/O module controlled by the
1747-ASB module is larger than the I/O modules image size.
For example, if an eight word RIO block transfer is made to a I/O
module with an image size of four words, an invalid length RIO
block transfer has occurred.
2. An RIO block transfer write is made to a slot that contains a
module that only has input image.
3. An RIO block transfer read is made from a slot that contains a
module that only has output image.
4. Invalid length block transfers are ignored by the 1747-ASB
module.

Testing the 1747ASB Module

The 1747-ASB module can be tested prior to beginning normal


operation by following the procedure provided below:
1. Install the 1747-ASB module and I/O modules into the remote
chassis, and if necessary, remote expansion chassis. Make sure
the PLC or SLC processor is in the program mode.
2. Apply power to all chassis.
3. After completing power up diagnostics, the 1747-ASB module
display appears as shown below:

ADAPTER
COMM

FAULT

Red FAULT LED is off.

Green COMM LED is off.


STATUS

Status display
indicates no RIO
communications
condition.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

68

Start-Up and Operation

4. Configure the PLC or SLC processor so that the scanner will


communicate on the RIO link with the 1747-ASB module. Place
the processor in the test mode. The 1747-ASB module display
appears as shown below:
Green COMM LED is flashing.
Status display
indicates a reset,
adapter reset condition.

ADAPTER
COMM

FAULT

Red FAULT LED is off.


STATUS

Green COMM LED is flashing.


Status display
indicates a reset,
adapter decide
condition.

ADAPTER
COMM

FAULT

Red FAULT LED is off.


STATUS

When the 1747-ASB module is receiving reset, adapter reset or reset,


adapter decide commands, it:
returns input data for all of its input modules and sends output
data to all of its specialty I/O modules. It does not turn any
discrete outputs on.
processes all discrete and block transfers
controls the specialty I/O modules in the same manner as an SLC
processor in TEST mode. How each specialty I/O module
responds to the TEST mode is specific to each specialty I/O
module. Refer to its user manual for more information.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Start-Up and Operation

I/O Module Installation and


Removal Under Power

69

ATTENTION: I/O modules must not be inserted or


removed when the remote chassis or remote expansion
chassis is powered. Damage to the I/O module and/or
remote chassis or remote expansion chassis may result.

The following describes how the 1747-ASB module responds if an


I/O module is inserted or removed from a remote chassis or remote
expansion chassis when no 1747-ASB module error is present.
Loss of power to the remote chassis or remote expansion chassis is considered a 1747ASB
module error. I/O modules can be inserted or removed from a remote expansion chassis that is
not powered, even if the remote chassis is powered. Each chassis has its own power supply.

I/O Module Insertion into a Slot


When an I/O module is inserted, a 1747-ASB module error occurs
and all discrete outputs under its control are cleared regardless of the
hold last state selection.

I/O Module Removal from a Scanned Slot


When an I/O module is removed from a slot being scanned by the
1747-ASB module, a 1747-ASB module error occurs and all discrete
outputs under its control are cleared regardless of the hold last state
selection.
Any I/O module that has input image and is mapped into the
1747-ASB module image, is always scanned by the 1747-ASB
module.
Any discrete I/O module or discretely mapped specialty I/O module
which is mapped into the 1747-ASB module image having only
output image, is scanned by the 1747-ASB module unless:
The 1747-ASB module is not receiving communications from the
scanner.
The 1747-ASB module is receiving reset, adapter decide
commands and the discrete outputs are being held in their last
state.
Any block transfer mapped specialty I/O module which is mapped
into the 1747-ASB image having only output image, is scanned by
the 1747-ASB module only when a block transfer write to the I/O
module occurs.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

610

Start-Up and Operation

I/O Module Removal from an Unscanned Slot


When an I/O module is removed from a slot not being scanned by
the 1747-ASB module, a 1747-ASB error does not occur and all
discrete outputs under its control are not affected.
Any I/O module not mapped into the 1747-ASB module image is
never scanned by the 1747-ASB module.
Any block transfer mapped specialty I/O module which is mapped
into the 1747-ASB image having only output image, is scanned by
the 1747-ASB module only when a block transfer write occurs.
If an I/O module that is not being scanned is removed, no 1747ASB error occurs. However, a
1747ASB module error occurs the next time the 1747ASB module attempts to scan the I/O
module. For example, if an output module is removed while the 1747ASB module is holding
discrete outputs in their last state due to a loss of RIO link communications, a 1747ASB module
error occurs when RIO link communications are restored.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Chapter

Troubleshooting
This chapter presents status display information during operational
and fault conditions.

Troubleshooting Introduction

The 1747-ASB module has two LEDs and a status display. These
LEDs and status display are used to indicate operating status and
error conditions while the module is operating.

Green COMM LED

ADAPTER
COMM

Status Display
indicates a unique
alphanumeric pattern.

Red FAULT LED

FAULT

STATUS

There are two types of errors: major and minor. A major error is
indicated by a constant red Fault LED. This type of error is usually
associated with the 1747-ASB module. A minor error is indicated by
a flashing red Fault LED. This type of error is usually associated
with a configuration error.
Important: The 1747-ASB status displays are scanned one at a time
at a high rate of speed by the 1747-ASB module.
Visually it appears as if the displays are all on at the
same time. If the status display is flickering
pronouncedly, the signal integrity on the RIO link has
been compromised by environmental noise, improper
termination, and/or improper cable installation. This
compromise results in a drop in the scan rate of the
1747-ASB module displays.

Contacting AllenBradley

If you need to contact Allen-Bradley for assistance, please have the


following information available when you call:
Processor type, 1747-ASB series letter, and firmware (FRN)
number. See label on left side of processor and 1747-ASB
module.
LED status and error codes
hardware types in the system including I/O modules and chassis

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

72

Troubleshooting

Status Operating Codes.A for


Normal Operating Conditions

COMM
LED

FAULT
LED

Status
Display

on

off

Normal RIO Communications

off

off

No RIO Communications

off

off

Partial RIO Communications

off

off

Processor Lockout is Preventing RIO


Communications

flashing

off

Reset, Adapter Decide Commands

flashing

off

Reset, Adapter Reset Commands

Operating Condition

When the 1747ASB module is holding outputs in their last state, the Status Display alternates
between the operating indication and HLS.
Some, but not all of the 1747ASB module's logical devices are receiving RIO link
communications from the scanner. The 1747ASB module is returning valid input data to the
scanner, but is not turning outputs on or off.
The 1747ASB module is locking the processor out while it is trying to communicate with all of the
1747ASB module's logical devices.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Troubleshooting

73

Error Operating Codes for


Error Conditions
COMM
LED

FAULT
LED

Status
Display

off

on

Power Up Self Test in progress

This appears for less than one second


after power is applied. Replace the
1747ASB module if condition persists.

off

on

Powerup OK. 1747ASB configuring


RIO image.

This occurs for several seconds after


power is applied. Replace the
1747ASB module if condition persists.

off

on

Powerup Self Test Error (normal


operating mode)

Cycle power to reset the 1747ASB


module. If the problem persists, replace
the 1747ASB module.

off

on

Runtime RAM Fault

Cycle power to reset the 1747ASB


module. If the problem persists, replace
the 1747ASB module.

off

on

Watchdog Reset Detected

Cycle power to reset the 1747ASB


module. If the problem persists, replace
the 1747ASB module.

Configuration Store Fault (EEPROM


failed write verification). The
nonvolatile memory is not being
written correctly when powering up in
Save Mode.

Cycle power to reset the 1747ASB


module. If the problem persists, replace
the 1747ASB module.

or

Error Condition

Corrective Action

off

on

off

flashing

Remote Power Fail (expansion


chassis powered down)

Apply power to all remote expansion


chassis. Check remote expansion cable
connections.

off

flashing

Bad Number of chassis (extra


expansion chassis, 4 or more)

Remove the extra chassis.

off

flashing

Invalid Starting Group (logical group


2 or 6 selected with 1/2slot
addressing).

Select starting logical group 0 or 4


(SW17,8).

off

flashing

Undefined Addressing Mode

Check addressing mode selection


(SW35,6).

off

flashing

1747ASB Module Image Size Too


Large (above 2 logical racks for
2slot addressing)

Check image size selection


(SW25,6,7,8). 16 logical groups is the
maximum size when 2slot addressing is
selected.

off

flashing

Illegal logical Rack Address (8 or


above in primary mode or 63 in
complementary mode).

Check the starting logical rack number


(SW11,2,3,4,5,6).

off

flashing

Last Address Exceeded (image


crosses into logical rack 8 in primary
mode or logical rack 63 in
complementary mode)

Check the starting logical rack number


(SW11,2,3,4,5,6), starting logical group
number (SW17,8), and image size
selection (SW25,6,7,8).

off

flashing

Last Chassis Not Allowed (when


primary mode is selected)

Check primary/complementary chassis


selection (SW23), and the last chassis
selection (SW34).

off

flashing

Invalid Baud Rate

Check baud rate selection (SW21,2).

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

74

Troubleshooting

COMM
LED

off

off

FAULT
LED

Status
Display

Check the addressing mode (SW35,6)


and the I/O module type installed in this
slot.

I/O Module Placement Error. A 32


point module may be installed in
slot# and 2slot addressing is
selected.

Remove the 32 point module or change


the addressing mode (SW35,6).

Module in slot# has only part of its


image assigned to the 1747ASB
image (1/2slot addressing and
discrete mode only).

Change 1747ASB module image size


(SW25,6,7,8) or specialty mode
(SW39).

An Unsupported I/O Module is


installed in slot#.

Remove the unsupported I/O module.

DIP Switch Configuration


Mismatch. The DIP switch values
that were stored when the 1747ASB
module was powered up in save
mode (SW38) do not match the
current settings now that the
1747ASB module is in check mode.

Change the incorrect switch settings, or


change to Save Mode.

I/O Configuration Mismatch and


Location. The I/O module
configuration that was stored when
the 1747ASB module was powered
up in save mode (SW38) does not
match the configuration now that the
1747ASB module is in check mode
due to a problem with slot#.

Correct the I/O module configuration


problem or change to the Save Mode.

flashing

Configuration Read Fault (data in


EEPROM not valid). The
configuration stored in nonvolatile
memory is not valid when powering
up in Check Mode.

Change to Save Mode and restore


power. Change back to Check Mode
and restore power.

flashing

Duplicate Adapter Address. There is


another adapter on the RIO link that
has the same RIO address as the
1747ASB module.

Check the 1747ASB module's starting


logical rack number (SW11,2,3,4,5,6),
and the 1747ASB module's starting
logical group number (SW17,8), and the
1747ASB module's image size
(SW25,6,7,8).

I/O Runtime Fault (Error,


Location).

Check the I/O module in slot#. Cycle


power to the 1747ASB module and the
I/O module. If the condition persists,
replace the I/O module.

Module is in test mode.

Check jumper pins on bottom of


1747ASB module. Make sure they are
not connected to anything.

flashing

flashing

Slot #

Slot #

flashing

and
Code 2

Code 3

off

flashing

and
Slot #

off

off

Code 4

off

Corrective Action

I/O Module Placement Error. The


I/O module in slot# may have its
image overlapping the image of the
I/O module in its paired slot.

Code 1

off

Error Condition

flashing

and
Slot #

on

on

8 indicates the 1747ASB module has encountered an unrecoverable fault.


Slot # is a 2digit decimal slot number between 1 and 31. 31 indicates the offending slot could not
be detected.
The Status Display alternates between these two codes. Code 1 is the incorrect parameter, Code
2 is the expected (saved) parameter`s value.
The Status Display alternates between these two codes. Code 3 indicates a module configuration
mismatch.
The Status Display alternates between these two codes. Code 4 indicates an I/O Error.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Troubleshooting

75

DIP Switch Configuration Mismatch Fault Codes - Codes 1 and 2


Code 1

Code 2

to

Meaning
Starting Logical Rack mismatch.
2digit decimal value previously saved is displayed
(rack 00 to rack 62).

or
or

Starting Logical Group mismatch.


1digit decimal value previously saved is displayed
(group 0, group 2, etc.).

or

or
or

Baud Rate mismatch.


Baud rate previously saved is displayed. Abbreviated
values are used.

or

Primary/Complementary Selection mismatch. The


mode previously saved is displayed.

to

Image Size mismatch.


Number of groups from 02 to 32 decimal indicates
previously saved selection.

or

Hold Last State (HLS) Selection mismatch. Yes or no


indicates if the HLS was (yes) or was not (no) the
previously saved selection.

or

Processor Restart Lockout (PRL) Selection mismatch.


Yes or no indicates if the PRL was (yes) or was not
(no) the previously saved selection.

or

Link Response Selection mismatch.


Unrestricted (unr) or Restricted (rSd) indicates
previously saved selection.

or

Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup mismatch.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

76

Troubleshooting

Code 1

Code 2

or
or

or

Meaning

Addressing Mode mismatch.


1/2slot, 1slot, and 2slot indicates previously saved
selection.

Specialty I/O Mode mismatch.


Discrete (dSc) or Block Transfer (bL) indicates
previously saved selection.

C stands for configuration, the first number from the left is the DIP switch number (SW1, SW2, or
SW3). The second number stands for the highest individual switch number (1 - 8). C38 is switch
SW3, switch 8.
This is the saved parameter setting.

I/O Module Configuration Mismatch Fault Codes - Code 3


Code 3

Meaning
I/O module missing from the previously saved configuration.
I/O module detected in an unused slot of the previously saved
configuration.
I/O Module Electrical Interface Type. Not the same as the saved
configuration such as a DC output module being placed in an AC output
slot.
I/O Module Mix or Class. Not the same as the saved configuration such
as a DC 16 point input module placed in an 8 point DC input slot.

The fault code is alternated with the corresponding slot number (L slot#).

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Troubleshooting

77

I/O Runtime Fault Codes - Code 4


Code 4

Meaning
I/O Parity Error
Hardware Parity Error or module installed or removed under power
I/O Module Removed Under Power
File Access Grant Timeout (specialty I/O only)
I/O Module Fault (generic)

through

I/O Module Reported Error Code

I/O Module Reported Error Code Unknown


Module Inserted Under Power
The fault code is alternated with the corresponding slot number (L slot#).

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Chapter

Application Examples
This chapter presents two SLC 500 examples and one PLC-5/40
example. The application examples consist of:
system overview
device configuration
processor image
1747-ASB module configuration details
mapping details
address label explanation
application program excerpt

Basic SLC 500 Example Using an RIO Scanner

The following is a very basic SLC 500 remote I/O application


example. This application consists of an SLC 5/02 processor
controlling one local and one remote chassis of I/O. The local I/O
resides in a 4-slot chassis, consisting of:
1746-OW8, 8 point AC/DC relay output module
1746-NIO4I, analog I/O combination module (2 current/voltage
inputs and 2 current outputs)
An SLC 5/02 or greater processor is needed for the RIO scanner.

A RIO scanner, Catalog Number 1747-SN, resides in slot 3 of the


local chassis. The scanner controls one remote 7-slot chassis using
one 1747-ASB module.
The 1747-ASB module controls the following I/O modules:
1746-IA16, 16 point 100/120 VAC input module in slots one,
two, and three
1746-OA16, 16 point AC output module in slots four, five, and
six

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

82

Application Examples

ASB
1746IA16
1746IA16
1746IA16
1746OA16
1746OA16
1746OA16

SLC 5/02
17461OW8
1746NIO4I
1747SN

The application is illustrated below. When the switch is closed,


bulbs 1 and 2 turn on and an analog signal is moved to analog
module output 1, which leads to the meter.

The meter is connected


to output 1.

The switch is connected


to input 15.

Bulb 2 is connected
to output 12.

Bulb 1 is connected
to output 4.

RIO Device Configuration


The 1747-ASB module is configured in the following manner.
Function

1747ASB Module 1

Starting logical rack number

Starting logical group number

Image size (number of logical groups)

Addressing mode

1slot

Specialty I/O mode

Discrete

Baud rate

230.4K

Last chassis

Yes

Hold last state

Yes

Processor restart lockout

Yes

Link

response

Primary/complementary chassis

Switch position does not matter


Complementary

The 1747SN Series A scanner cannot perform block transfers. Any specialty I/O modules
controlled by this scanner must be discretely mapped.
Link response does not matter at 230.4K baud.

For more details on the 1747-SN RIO scanner, refer to the user
manual, publication 1747-6.6.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Application Examples

83

The RIO scanner is configured for 230.4K baud. The SLC 5/02
G-file is configured as shown below:
1747ASB

Bit Number Decimal

15

14

13

12

11

10

Logical Rack 3
Starting Group
6
4
2
0

Logical Rack 2
Starting Group
6
4
2
0

Logical Rack 1
Starting Group
6
4
2
0

Starting Logical Group, Word 1

Device Size, Word 2

Logical Rack 0
Starting Group
6
4
2
0

Logical Rack 0 consists of one


logical device, beginning at Group 0.
The device size is six logical groups.

SLC Processor Image


Shown below are the SLC processors input and output image. The
SLC processor image is comprised of the local I/O module images
and the RIO scanner images. The RIO scanner image size is four
logical racks. The 1747-ASB module is in the RIO scanner image.

SLC Processor Input Image


Bit Number (Decimal)

Logical
Rack 0

Logical
Rack 1

Logical
Rack 2

Logical
Rack 3

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

15

8 7

NIO4I
IA16
IA16
IA16

Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used

SLC Processor Output Image

NIO4I
IA16
IA16
IA16

Bit Number (Decimal)

I:2.0 & .1
I:3.0
I:3.1
I:3.2
I:3.3
I:3.4
I:3.5
I:3.6
I:3.7
I:3.8
I:3.9
I:3.10
I:3.11
I:3.12
I:3.13
I:3.14
I:3.15
I:3.16
I:3.17
I:3.18
I:3.19
I:3.20
I:3.21
I:3.22
I:3.23
I:3.24
I:3.25
I:3.26
I:3.27
I:3.28
I:3.29
I:3.30
I:3.31

Local SLC Chassis


remote slot 1
remote slot 2
remote slot 3
remote slot 4
remote slot 5
remote slot 6

15

8 7

NIO4I

Logical
Rack 0

Logical
Rack 1

Scanner Image

Logical
Rack 2

Logical
Rack 3

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

OA16
OA16
OA16

OW8
NIO4I
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used

Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used

OA16
OA16
OA16

O:1.0
Local SLC Chassis
O:2.0 & .1
remote slot 1
O:3.0
remote slot 2
O:3.1
remote slot 3
O:3.2
remote slot 4
O:3.3
O:3.4
O:3.5
O:3.6
O:3.7
O:3.8
O:3.9
O:3.10
O:3.11
O:3.12
O:3.13
O:3.14
O:3.15
O:3.16
O:3.17
O:3.18
O:3.19
O:3.20
O:3.21
O:3.22
O:3.23
O:3.24
O:3.25
O:3.26
O:3.27
O:3.28
O:3.29
O:3.30
O:3.31

remote slot 5
remote slot 6

Scanner Image

I = input image
O = output image
:3 = slot # RIO scanner uses in local SLC chassis
.x = scanner word

The default configuration size of the scanner image is 32 words.


You can specify that the SLC 5/02 processor scan is less than 32
words with your programming device.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

84

Application Examples

1747ASB Module Configuration Details


The entire image of the 1747-ASB module is contained in logical
rack 0. It does not cross a logical rack boundary. Therefore, it
appears as one logical device to the scanner.

SLC Processor Input Image


Bit Number (Decimal)

Logical
Rack 0

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

15

8 7

NIO4I
IA16
IA16
IA16

Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used

SLC Processor Output Image

NIO4I
IA16
IA16
IA16

Bit Number (Decimal)

I:2.0 & .1
I:3.0
I:3.1
I:3.2
I:3.3
I:3.4
I:3.5
I:3.6
I:3.7

Local SLC Chassis


remote slot 1
remote slot 2
remote slot 3
remote slot 4
remote slot 5
remote slot 6

Scanner Image

15

8 7

NIO4I

Logical
Rack 0

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

OA16
OA16
OA16

OW8
NIO4I
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used

Not Used
Not Used

OA16
OA16
OA16

O:1.0
Local SLC Chassis
O:2.0 & .1
remote slot 1
O:3.0
remote slot 2
O:3.1
remote slot 3
O:3.2
remote slot 4
O:3.3
O:3.4
O:3.5
O:3.6
O:3.7

remote slot 5
remote slot 6

Scanner Image

The 1747-ASB module is configured as the last chassis because it


uses the highest numbered logical group in the highest logical rack it
resides in.
The 1747-ASB module is configured for hold last state and processor
restart lockout. If the RIO communications cable is removed and
reconnected during normal RIO communications, the discrete
outputs remain in their last state and the 1747-ASB module does not
resume communicating with the scanner, until the processor restart
lockout terminals are momentarily shorted together. For more
information regarding processor restart lockout, refer to chapter 4.
The 1747-ASB module is configured as a complementary chassis.
Because complementary I/O is not being used, there is no need for a
primary chassis.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Application Examples

85

1747ASB Module I/O Mapping Details


The 1747-ASB module is configured for 1-slot addressing. Its image
starts at group 0 of logical rack 0 and is sized for six logical groups.
There are six 16 bit words of input and output image for its three 16
point input and output modules.
Three input and output image words are not used. However, when
using 16 point I/O, 1-slot addressing provides I/O configuration
flexibility. The modules can be inserted into any slot, in any order.
Slots 1, 2, and 3 contain 16 point input modules. The output words
assigned to these slots are unused.
Slots 4, 5, and 6 contain 16 point output modules. The input words
assigned to these slots are unused.

SLC Processor Input Image


Bit Number (Decimal)

Logical
Rack 0

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

15

8 7

NIO4I
IA16
IA16
IA16

Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used

SLC Processor Output Image

NIO4I
IA16
IA16
IA16

Bit Number (Decimal)

Local SLC Chassis


I:2.0 & .1
I:3.0
I:3.1
I:3.2
I:3.3
I:3.4
I:3.5
I:3.6
I:3.7

remote slot 1
remote slot 2
remote slot 3
remote slot 4
remote slot 5
remote slot 6

Scanner Image

15

8 7

NIO4I

Logical
Rack 0

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

OA16
OA16
OA16

OW8
NIO4I
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used

Not Used
Not Used

OA16
OA16
OA16

O:1.0
O:2.0
O:3.0
O:3.1
O:3.2
O:3.3
O:3.4
O:3.5
O:3.6
O:3.7

RIO Address Label Examples


Due to the 1747-ASB modules addressing modes and RIO link
operation, the I/O modules controlled by the 1747-ASB module are
addressed by the SLC processor based on the slot location of the SN
and the word that the I/O module uses in the SN image. A label kit
is included with each 1747-ASB module to assist you in addressing
I/O modules.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

86

Application Examples

The meter is connected


to output 1.

0-7 n

BT

Bulb 2 is connected
to output 12.

8 - 15 n

0-7 n

SN Word(s)

The switch is connected


to input 15.
SN Slot

ASB
1746IA16
1746IA16
1746IA16
1746OA16
1746OA16
1746OA16

SLC 5/02
1746OW8
1746NIO4I
1747SN

Shown below are examples of how the labels are filled out.

8 - 15 n

SN Word(s)

Discrete n

BT

Remote SLC System

Bulb 1 is connected
to output 4.
0-7 n

SN Slot

8 - 15 n
3

SN Slot

SN Word(s)

Discrete n

BT

Remote SLC System

Discrete n

Remote SLC System

The 0-7 and 8-15 boxes are checked


because the module requires more than
one byte of image.

The 0-7 and 8-15 boxes are checked


because the module requires more
than one byte of image.

The SN Slot is 3 because that is the slot


the scanner occupies in the local SLC
chassis.

The SN Slot is 3 because that is the


slot the scanner occupies in the local
SLC chassis.

The SN Word is 0 because it is the SN


image word assigned to the IA16. These
values are determined by converting the
module's logical rack and logical group
numbers (logical rack 0, G0) to the
corresponding SN words.

The SN Word is 3 because it is the


SN image word assigned to the
OA16. The value is determined by
converting the module's logical rack
and logical group numbers (logical
rack 0, G3) to the corresponding SN
word.

The 0-7 and 8-15 boxes are


checked because the module
requires more than one byte of
image.
The SN Slot is 3 because that is the
slot the scanner occupies in the local
SLC chassis.
The SN Word is 4 because it is the
SN image word assigned to the
OA16. These values are determined
by converting the module's logical
rack and logical group numbers
(logical rack 0, G4) to the
corresponding SN word.

Application Example Program


Shown below is an excerpt from the user program. When the switch
is closed, bulbs 1 and 2 turn on and the decimal value 5555 is moved
to analog output 1 and is converted to an analog signal.

Switch

I:3.0
] [
15

MOV
MOVE
Source
Dest

5555
O:2.1

Meter

Bulb 1

Bulb 2

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

O:3.4
( )
4
O:3.3
( )
12

Application Examples

SLC 500 Example - Using an


RIO Scanner

87

This application consists of an SLC 5/02 processor controlling local


and remote I/O. The local I/O resides in a 4-slot chassis, consisting
of:
1746-OW8, 8 point AC/DC relay output module
1746-IA8, 8 point AC input module
An SLC 5/02 or greater processor is needed for the RIO scanner.

An RIO scanner, Catalog Number 1747-SN, resides in slot 3 of the


local chassis. The scanner controls two remote expansion chassis
(one 7-slot and one 4-slot) and a RediPANEL.
1747-ASB module 1 controls the following I/O modules:
1746-NIO4I, analog module (2 current/voltage inputs and 2
current outputs)
1746-IV32, 32 point 24VDC sourcing input module
1746-OV32, 32 point 24VDC sinking output module
1746-OB16, 16 point DC sourcing output module
1746-OA16, 16 point AC output module
1747-ASB module 2 controls the following I/O modules:
1746-OA8, 8 point AC output module
1746-IO12, 6 point input/output module
1746-IA16, 16 point AC input module

The meter is connected


to output 1.

The switch is connected


to input 17.

Bulb 2 is connected
to output 12.

1746IA16

ASB 2
0

1746IO12

1746OA8

ASB 1
17460NIO4I
EMPTY
1746IV32
1746OV32
1746OB16
1746OA16

SLC 5/02
1746OW8
1746IA8
1747SN

The application is illustrated below. When the switch is closed,


bulbs 1 and 2 turn on and an analog signal is moved to analog
module output 1, which leads to the meter.

RediPANEL

Bulb 1 is connected
to output 4.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

88

Application Examples

RIO Device Configuration


The 1747-ASB modules and RediPANEL are configured in the
following manner.
1747ASB
Module 1

Function

1747ASB
Module 2

RediPANEL

Starting logical rack number

Starting logical group number

Image size (number of logical


groups)

Addressing mode

1slot

2slot

Not applicable

Specialty I/O mode

Discrete

Discrete

Not applicable

Baud rate

230.4K

230.4K

230.4K

Last chassis

No

Yes

Yes

Hold last state

Yes

No

Not applicable

Processor restart lockout

Yes

No

Not applicable

Link response

Switch position
does not matter

Switch position
does not matter

Not applicable

Primary/complementary chassis

Complementary

Complementary

Not applicable

The only part of the RediPANEL configuration that is important is the RIO address and baud rate.
The 1747SN Series A scanner cannot perform block transfers. Any specialty I/O modules
controlled by this scanner must be discretely mapped.
Link response does not matter at 230.4K baud.

For more details on the 1747-SN RIO scanner, refer to the user
manual.
The RIO scanner is configured for 230.4K baud. The SLC 5/02
G-file is configured as shown below:

Bit Number Decimal

15

14

13

12

Logical Rack 3
Starting Group
6
4
2
0
Starting Logical Group, Word 1

Device Size, Word 2

RediPANEL

1747ASB #1

11

10

Logical Rack 2
Starting Group
6
4
2
0

Logical Rack 1
Starting Group
6
4
2
0

Logical Rack 0
Starting Group
6
4
2
0

Logical Rack 2 consists of two


logical devices. The first one
begins at Group 0. The device
size is four logical groups. The
second one begins at Group 4.
The device size is four logical
groups.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

1747ASB #2

Logical Rack 1
consists of one
logical device,
beginning at Group
6. The device size
is two logical
groups.

Logical Rack 0
consists of one
logical device,
beginning at Group
0. The device size
is two logical
groups.

Application Examples

89

SLC Processor Image


Shown below are the SLC processors input and output image. The
SLC processor image is comprised of the local I/O module images
and the RIO scanner images. The RIO scanner image size is four
logical racks. 1747-ASB module 1, 1747-ASB module 2, and the
RediPANEL are in the RIO scanner image.

SLC Processor Input Image


Bit Number (Decimal)

Logical
Rack 0

Logical
Rack 1

Logical
Rack 2

Logical
Rack 3

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

15

8 7

IA8

IO12
IA16

IA16
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used

I:2.0
I:3.0
I:3.1
I:3.2
I:3.3
I:3.4
I:3.5
I:3.6
I:3.7
I:3.8
I:3.9
I:3.10
I:3.11
I:3.12
I:3.13
I:3.14
I:3.15
I:3.16
I:3.17
I:3.18
I:3.19
I:3.20
I:3.21
I:3.22
I:3.23
I:3.24
I:3.25
I:3.26
I:3.27
I:3.28
I:3.29
I:3.30
I:3.31

NIO4I
NIO4I
IV32
IV32

NIO4I
NIO4I
IV32
IV32

Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used

SLC Processor Output Image


Local SLC Chassis

Bit Number (Decimal)

1747ASB Module 2
Logical
Rack 0
Scanner Image
Logical
Rack 1

1747ASB Module 1

RediPANEL

Logical
Rack 2

Logical
Rack 3

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

15

8 7

OW8
OA8

IO12
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used

NIO4I
NIO4I
OV32
OV32
OB16
OA16

NIO4I
NIO4I
OV32
OV32
OB16
OA16

Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used

O:1.0
O:3.0
O:3.1
O:3.2
O:3.3
O:3.4
O:3.5
O:3.6
O:3.7
O:3.8
O:3.9
O:3.10
O:3.11
O:3.12
O:3.13
O:3.14
O:3.15
O:3.16
O:3.17
O:3.18
O:3.19
O:3.20
O:3.21
O:3.22
O:3.23
O:3.24
O:3.25
O:3.26
O:3.27
O:3.28
O:3.29
O:3.30
O:3.31

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

810

Application Examples

1747ASB Module 1 Configuration Details


Because 1747-ASB module 1s image crosses the logical rack
boundary of racks 1 and 2, 1747-ASB module 1 appears as two
logical devices to the RIO scanner.

SLC Processor Input Image

Bit Number (Decimal)

Logical
Rack 1
Logical
Rack 2

Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

15

8 7

NIO4I
NIO4I
IV32
IV32

SLC Processor Output Image

NIO4I
NIO4I
IV32
IV32

I:3.14
I:3.15
I:3.16
I:3.17
I:3.18
I:3.19
I:3.20
I:3.21
I:3.22
I:3.23

Bit Number (Decimal)

Logical
Rack 1
1747ASB
Module 1
RediPANEL

Logical
Rack 2

Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

15

8 7

NIO4I
NIO4I
OV32
OV32
OB16
OA16

NIO4I
NIO4I
OV32
OV32
OB16
OA16

O:3.14
O:3.15
O:3.16
O:3.17
O:3.18
O:3.19
O:3.20
O:3.21
O:3.22
O:3.23

1747ASB
Module 1
RediPANEL

1747-ASB module 1 is not configured as the last chassis because the


highest numbered logical group it uses (Group 3) is not the highest
numbered logical group in the highest logical rack it resides in. The
RediPANEL uses the highest numbered logical group (Group 7) in
logical rack 2.
1747-ASB module 1 is configured for hold last state and processor
restart lockout. If the RIO communications cable is removed and
reconnected during normal RIO communications, the discrete
outputs remain in their last state and the 1747-ASB module does not
resume communicating with the scanner, until the processor restart
lockout terminals are momentarily shorted together. For more
information regarding processor restart lockout, refer to chapter 4.
1747-ASB module 1 is configured as a complementary chassis.
Because complementary I/O is not being used, there is no need for a
primary chassis.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Application Examples

811

1747ASB Module 2 Configuration Details


Because 1747-ASB module 2s image does not cross the logical rack
boundary, 1747-ASB module 2 appears as one logical device to the
scanner.

SLC Processor Input Image


Bit Number (Decimal)

Logical
Rack 0

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

15

8 7

IO12
IA16

IA16
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used

SLC Processor Output Image

Bit Number (Decimal)


I:3.0
I:3.1
I:3.2
I:3.3
I:3.4
I:3.5
I:3.6
I:3.7

1747ASB
Module 2

Logical
Rack 0

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

15

8 7

IO12

OA8
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used

O:3.0
O:3.1
O:3.2
O:3.3
O:3.4
O:3.5
O:3.6
O:3.7

1747ASB
Module 2

1747-ASB module 2 is configured as last chassis because it has the


highest numbered logical group (group 1) in the highest numbered
logical rack (rack 0).
1747-ASB module 2 is not configured for hold last state and
processor restart lockout. If the RIO communications cable is
removed and reconnected during normal RIO communications, the
discrete outputs are reset and the 1747-ASB module automatically
resumes communicating with the scanner.
1747-ASB module 2 is configured as a complementary chassis.
Because complementary I/O is not being used, there is no need for a
primary chassis.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

812

Application Examples

1747ASB Module 1 I/O Mapping Details


Because 1747-ASB module 1 is configured for 1-slot addressing, has
six logical groups and six slots available for I/O, all of the slots
present are mapped into the scanner image. No extra slots in the
chassis, or extra words in the image remain.
Because the specialty I/O mode chosen is discrete mode and the
1747-ASB module is configured for 1-slot addressing, all specialty
modules that have two words or less of input and output image are
discretely mapped.
The 1746-NIO4I module requires two input and two output words.
Therefore, it is discretely mapped. When 1-slot addressing is
selected, two words of input image and two words of output image
are available for each slot pair. Because it requires both words of the
input and output image, slot 2 must remain empty. If an I/O module
is inserted into slot 2, a 1747-ASB module error occurs.
Due to slot pairing, two 32 point modules that have opposite
functions (one input and one output), are allowed in one slot pair
using 1-slot addressing. The 32 point input module, Catalog Number
1746-IV32, installed in slot 3 uses the input image words assigned to
slots 3 and 4. No input image is available for slot 4. Slot 4 can use
the output image that slot 3 is not using. Therefore, a 32 point output
module, Catalog Number 1746-OV32 uses the output image assigned
to slots 3 and 4.
Slots 5 and 6 contain 16 point output modules. The input words
assigned to these slots are not used.

SLC Processor Input Image


Bit Number (Decimal)

Logical
Rack 2

15

8 7

Bit Number (Decimal)

Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

NIO4I
NIO4I
IV32
IV32

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

SLC Processor Output Image

NIO4I
NIO4I
IV32
IV32

I:3.14
I:3.15
I:3.16
I:3.17
I:3.18
I:3.19
I:3.20
I:3.21
I:3.22
I:3.23

1747ASB
Module 1
RediPANEL

Logical
Rack 2

15

8 7

Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

NIO4I
NIO4I
OV32
OV32
OB16
OA16

NIO4I
NIO4I
OV32
OV32
OB16
OA16

O:3.14
O:3.15
O:3.16
O:3.17
O:3.18
O:3.19
O:3.20
O:3.21
O:3.22
O:3.23

1747ASB
Module 1
RediPANEL

Application Examples

813

1747ASB Module 2 I/O Mapping Details


Because 1747-ASB module 2 is configured for 2-slot addressing, has
two logical groups and three slots available for I/O, all of the slots
present are mapped into the scanner image. One extra byte of input
and output image remain unassigned to any slot because there is no
slot 4 in the chassis. Due to slot pairing, slot 3 can use the extra
image space.
Because the specialty I/O mode chosen is discrete mode and the
1747-ASB module is configured for 2-slot addressing, all specialty
modules having one word or less of input and output image are
discretely mapped.
Slot 1 contains an 8 point output module, Catalog Number
1746-OA8, that uses the output image assigned to slot 1. The input
image assigned to slot 1 is unused. Slot 2 contains a combination
module, Catalog Number 1746-IO12 that uses the input and output
byte assigned to slot 2.
Because there is no slot 4, the image assigned to slot 4 can be used
by slot 3. A 16 point input module, Catalog Number 1746-IA16 is
installed in slot 3, using the input images assigned to slots 3 and 4.
The output image for slots 3 and 4 is not used.

SLC Processor Input Image


Bit Number (Decimal)

Logical
Rack 0

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0

15

8 7

IO12
IA16

IA16
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used

SLC Processor Output Image

Bit Number (Decimal)


I:3.0
I:3.1
I:3.2
I:3.3
I:3.4
I:3.5
I:3.6
I:3.7
I:3.8

1747ASB
Module 2

Logical
Rack 0

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0

15

8 7

IO12

OA8
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used

O:3.0
O:3.1
O:3.2
O:3.3
O:3.4
O:3.5
O:3.6
O:3.7
O:3.8

1747ASB
Module 2

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

814

Application Examples

RIO Address Label Examples


Due to the 1747-ASB modules addressing modes and RIO link
operation, the I/O modules controlled by the 1747-ASB module are
addressed by the SLC processor based on the slot location of the SN
and the word that the I/O module uses in the SN image. A label kit
is included with each 1747-ASB module to assist you in addressing
I/O modules.

The meter is connected


to output 1.
0-7 n

8 - 15 n
3

SN Slot
SN Word(s)
BT

14, 15

Discrete n

Remote SLC System

The 0-7 and 8-15 boxes are


checked because the module
requires more than one byte of
image.
The SN Slot is 3 because that is
the slot the scanner occupies in
the local SLC chassis.
The SN Words are 14, 15
because they are the SN image
words assigned to the NIO4I.
These values are determined by
converting the module's logical
rack and logical group numbers
(logical rack 1, G6, G7) to the
corresponding SN words.

The switch is connected


to input 17.
0-7 n

8 - 15 n

SN Word(s)
BT

16, 17

The SN Slot is 3 because that is


the slot the scanner occupies in the
local SLC chassis.
The SN Words are 16, 17 because
they are the SN image words
assigned to the IV32. These
values are determined by
converting the module's logical rack
and logical group numbers (logical
rack 2, GO, G1) to the
corresponding SN words.

1746IA16

Bulb 1 is connected
to output 4.
8 - 15 n

0-7
3

SN Slot
19

Discrete n

Remote SLC System

The 0-7 and 8-15 boxes are


checked because the module
requires more than one byte of
image. Bits 16-31 must be
converted to bits 0-15 in the SN
image, and the next word (word 17)
used for the I/O reference.

RediPANEL

8 - 15 n

SN Word(s)
BT

Remote SLC System

SN Slot

Discrete n

Bulb 2 is connected
to output 12.
0-7 n

SN Slot

1746IO12

1746OA8

ASB 2

SLC 5/02
1746OW8
1746IA8
1747SN

ASB 1
1746NIO4I
EMPTY
1746IV32
1746OV32
1746OB16
1746OA16

Shown below are examples of how the labels are filled out.

The 0-7 and 8-15 boxes are


checked because the module
requires more than one byte of
image.
The SN Slot is 3 because that is
the slot the scanner occupies in
the local SLC chassis.
The SN Word is 19 because it is
the SN image word assigned to
the OA16. The value is
determined by converting the
module's logical rack and logical
group numbers (logical rack 2, G3)
to the corresponding SN word.

SN Word(s)
BT

Discrete n

Remote SLC System

The 8-15 box is checked


because the module requires
the most significant byte of
image. Bits 0-7 must be
converted to bits 8-15 in the
SN image.
The SN Slot is 3 because that
is the slot the scanner
occupies in the local SLC
chassis.
The SN Word is 0 because it is
the SN image word assigned to
the IO12. These values are
determined by converting the
module's logical rack and
logical group numbers (logical
rack 0, G0) to the
corresponding SN word.

Input bits 16-31 must be converted to 0-15 by subtracting 16. Therefore, Input bit 17 is converted
to 1.
Input and Output bits 0-7 must be converted to 8-15 by adding 8. Therefore, Input bit 4 is
converted to 12.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Application Examples

815

Application Example Program


Shown below is an excerpt from the user program. When the switch
is closed, bulbs 1 and 2 turn on and the decimal value 5555 is moved
to analog output 1 and is converted to an analog signal.
I:3.17
] [
1

Switch

MOV
MOVE
Source

5555

Dest

O:3.15

Meter
O:3.0
( )
12

Bulb 1

O:3.19
( )
12

Bulb 2

Input bits 16-31 must be converted to 0-15 by subtracting 16. Therefore, Input bit 17 is converted
to 1.
Input and Output bits 0-7 must be converted to 8-15 by adding 8. Therefore, Input bit 12 is
converted to 4.

The meter is connected


to output 1.

The switch is connected


to input 17.

Bulb 2 is connected
to output 12.

1746IA16

ASB 2
0

1746IO12

1746OA8

ASB 1
1746NIO4I
EMPTY
1746IV32
1746OV32
1746OB16
1746OA16

SLC 5/02
1746OW8
1746IA8
1747SN

The following is another representation of what is discussed above.

RediPANEL

Bulb 1 is connected
to output 4.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

816

Application Examples

PLC5 Example

This application consists of a PLC-5/40 processor controlling local


and remote I/O.
The PLC-5/40 built-in scanner controls two 1747-ASB modules.
1747-ASB module 1 controls a 7-slot and 10-slot chassis. The I/O
modules residing in those chassis are:
1746-NIO4V, analog module (2 current or voltage inputs and 2
voltage outputs)
1746-OW8, 8 point AC/DC Relay output module
1746-OW16, 16 point AC/DC Relay output module
1746-IA16, 16 point AC input module
1746-OG16, 16 point TTL output module
1746-IG16, 16 point TTL input module
1746-OW8, 8 point AC/DC Relay output module
1746-OV8, 8 point DC sinking output module
1746-OB16, 16 point DC sourcing output module
1746-IB16, 16 point DC sinking input module
1746-OA8, 8 point AC output module
1746-NO4V, analog module (4 voltage outputs)
1746-OW16, 16 point AC/DC Relay output module
1746-IA16, 16 point AC input module
1746-OV16, 16 point DC sinking output module
1746-IV16, 16 point DC sourcing input module
1747-ASB module 2 controls a 4-slot chassis. The I/O modules
residing in the SLC chassis are:
1746-NI4, analog module (4 current inputs)
1746-NO4I, analog module (4 current outputs)
1746-NIO4I, analog module (2 current or voltage inputs and 2
current outputs)
The application is illustrated on the following page. When the
switch is closed, the bulb turns on. An analog signal is sent from the
1746-NIO4I module to meter 1 and a voltage signal is sent from the
1746-NO4V module to meter 2.
For more information regarding the PLC-5/40 processor, refer to the
installation manual.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

The switch is connected


to input 12.

9 10

11 12 13

14 15 16

Meter 2 is connected
to output 2.

The bulb is connected


to output 5.

817

ASB 2
1746-NI4
1746-NO4I
1746-NIO4I

1746-OA8
1746-NO4V
1746-OW16
1746-IA16
1746-OV16
1746-IV16

PLC5/40

1746-OW8
1746-OV8
1746-OB16
1746-IB16

ASB 1
1746-NIO4V
1746-OW8
1746-OW16
1746-IA16
1746-OG16
1746-IG16

Application Examples

Meter 1 is connected
to output 0.

Important: All bit numbers in this example are in octal. The 1746
16 and 32 point modules must have their LED numbers
and wiring terminal numbers labeled in octal. All
Series C or later modules include an octal conversion
kit which allows you to convert from decimal to octal.
This kit is also available as a replacement part through
your Allen-Bradley distributor.

RIO Device Configuration


The 1747-ASB modules are configured in the following manner.
Function

1747ASB Module 1

1747ASB Module 2

Starting logical rack number

Starting logical group number

Image size (number of logical groups)

Addressing mode

2slot

1/2slot

Specialty I/O mode

Block transfer

Discrete

Baud rate

57.6K

57.6K

Last chassis

Yes

Yes

Hold last state

Yes

No

Processor restart lockout

Yes

No

Link response

Unrestricted

Unrestricted

Primary/complementary chassis

Complementary

Complementary

When block transfer mode is selected, all specialty I/O modules are block transfer mapped. Their
data is exchanged on the RIO link using RIO block transfers.

The 1771 chassis is configured for 1-slot addressing. The PLC-5/40


is configured for scanner mode operation at 57.6K baud.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

818

Application Examples

PLC Processor Image


Because the 4-slot local chassis is configured for 1-slot addressing,
the first four logical groups of logical rack 0 are used for local I/O,
the remaining four groups are not used.
Logical racks 1, 2, and 3 are available for remote I/O because they
are not used by the local chassis.

PLC Processor Input Image


Bit Number Octal

Logical
Rack 0

Logical
Rack 1

Logical
Rack 2

Logical
Rack 3

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

17

10 7

Bit Number Octal

Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used

I:000
I:001
I:002
I:003
I:004
I:005
I:006
I:007
I:010
I:011
I:012
I:013
I:014
I:015
I:016
I:017
I:020
I:021
I:022
I:023
I:024
I:025
I:026
I:027
I:030
I:031
I:032
I:033
I:034
I:035
I:036
I:037

NIO4V
IA16
IG16

IA16
IG16

IB16
NO4V
IA16
IV16
NI4
NI4
NI4
NI4
NIO4I
NIO4I

IB16

Not Used
Not Used

Not Used
Not Used

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

PLC Processor Output Image

IA16
IV16

NI4
NI4
NI4
NI4
NIO4I
NIO4I

Local I/O

Logical
Rack 0

Logical
Rack 1

1747ASB
Module 1

1747ASB
Module 2

Logical
Rack 2

Logical
Rack 3

17

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

10 7

Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used

O:000
O:001
O:002
O:003
O:004
O:005
O:006
O:007
O:010
O:011
O:012
O:013
O:014
O:015
O:016
O:017
O:020
O:021
O:022
O:023
O:024
O:025
O:026
O:027
O:030
O:031
O:032
O:033
O:034
O:035
O:036
O:037

OW8
OW16
OG16
OV8
OB16
NO4V
OW16
OV16
NO4I
NO4I
NO4I
NO4I
NIO4I
NIO4I

Not Used
Not Used

Not Used
Not Used

NIO4V
OW16
OG16
OW8
OB16
OA8
OW16
OV16
NO4I
NO4I
NO4I
NO4I
NIO4I
NIO4I

Local I/O

1747ASB
Module 1

1747ASB
Module 2

Application Examples

819

1747ASB Module 1 Configuration Details


Because the image of the 1747-ASB module 1 crosses logical rack
boundary 1 and 2, 1747-ASB module 1 appears as two logical
devices to the RIO scanner.

PLC Processor Input Image


Bit Number Octal

Logical
Rack 1

Logical
Rack 2

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

17

10 7

Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used

NIO4V
IA16
IG16

IA16
IG16

IB16
NO4V
IA16
IV16

IB16

Not Used
Not Used

PLC Processor Output Image


Bit Number Octal

IA16
IV16

I:010
I:011
I:012
I:013
I:014
I:015
I:016
I:017
I:020
I:021
I:022
I:023
I:024
I:025
I:026
I:027

Logical
Rack 1

1747ASB
Module 1

Logical
Rack 2

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

17

10 7

Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used

O:010
O:011
O:012
O:013
O:014
O:015
O:016
O:017
O:020
O:021
O:022
O:023
O:024
O:025
O:026
O:027

OW8
OW16
OG16
OV8
OB16
NO4V
OW16
OV16

Not Used
Not Used

NIO4V
OW16
OG16
OW8
OB16
OA8
OW16
OV16

1747ASB
Module 1

1747-ASB module 1 is configured for last chassis because it has the


highest numbered logical group (group 5) in its highest numbered
logical rack (logical rack 2).
1747-ASB module 1 is configured for hold last state and processor
restart lockout. If the RIO communications cable is removed and
reconnected during normal RIO communications, the discrete
outputs remain in their last state and the 1747-ASB module does not
resume communicating with the scanner until the processor restart
lockout terminals are momentarily shorted together. For more
information regarding processor restart lockout, refer to chapter 4.
1747-ASB module 1 is configured as a complementary chassis.
Because complementary I/O is not being used, there is no need for a
primary chassis.
The 1747-ASB module 1 response time is unrestricted because the
PLC-5/40 does not require a restricted response time.
Important: Selecting processor restart lockout disables PLC auto
configurations on the 1747-ASB module except for
initial powerup. If processor restart lockout is not
selected, you are able to perform PLC auto
configurations on the 1747-ASB module.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

820

Application Examples

1747ASB Module 2 Configuration Details


Because the image of 1747-ASB module 2 does not cross a logical
rack boundary, 1747-ASB module 2 appears as one logical device to
the scanner.

PLC Processor Input Image


Bit Number Octal

Logical
Rack 3

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

17

10 7

NI4
NI4
NI4
NI4
NIO4I
NIO4I

Not Used
Not Used

PLC Processor Output Image


Bit Number Octal

NI4
NI4
NI4
NI4
NIO4I
NIO4I

I:030
I:031
I:032
I:033
I:034
I:035
I:036
I:037

1747ASB
Module 2

Logical
Rack 3

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

17

10 7

NO4I
NO4I
NO4I
NO4I
NIO4I
NIO4I

Not Used
Not Used

NO4I
NO4I
NO4I
NO4I
NIO4I
NIO4I

O:030
O:031
O:032
O:033
O:034
O:035
O:036
O:037

1747ASB
Module 2

1747-ASB module 2 is configured for last chassis because it has the


highest logical group (group 5) in its highest numbered logical rack
(logical rack 3).
1747-ASB module 2 is not configured for hold last state and
processor restart lockout. If the RIO communications cable is
removed and reconnected during normal RIO communications, the
discrete outputs are reset and the 1747-ASB module automatically
resumes communicating with the PLC-5/40.
1747-ASB module 2 is configured as a complementary chassis.
Because complementary I/O is not being used, there is no need for a
primary chassis.
The 1747-ASB module 2 response time is unrestricted because the
PLC-5/40 does not require a restricted response time.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Application Examples

821

1747ASB Module 1 I/O Mapping Details


Because 1747-ASB module 1 is configured for 2-slot addressing, has
eight logical groups and 16 I/O slots available, all of the slots present
are mapped into the PLC-5/40 image. No extra slots in the chassis or
extra words in the image remain. Each slot is assigned one byte in
the PLC-5/40 input and output images.

Slot Pair

PLC Processor Input Image


Bit Number Octal

Logical
Rack 1

Logical
Rack 2
Group 7

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6

17

10 7

NIO4V
IA16
IG16

IA16
IG16

IB16
NO4V
IA16
IV16

IB16

Not Used
Not Used

IA16
IV16

I:027

I:010
I:011
I:012
I:013
I:014
I:015
I:016
I:017
I:020
I:021
I:022
I:023
I:024
I:025
I:026

9 10

1746OA8
1746NO4V
1746OW16
1746IA16
1746OV16
1746IV16
11 12 13

14 15 16

PLC Processor Output Image


Bit Number Octal

Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used

1746OW8
1746OV8
1746OB16
1746IB16

1746NIO4V
1746OW8
1746OW16
1746IA16
1746OG16
1746IG16

ASB 1

1747-ASB module 1 is configured for block transfer specialty I/O


mode. Therefore, all specialty I/O modules are block transfer
mapped. If specialty I/O modules are used, their paired slots can
only use 8 point (or smaller) discrete input, discrete output, or block
transfer mapped specialty modules, as shown below. 16 point
discrete output modules can be used if their paired slots have discrete
(16 point or less) input modules in them, as shown below. 32 point
modules cannot be used with 2-slot addressing.

Logical
Rack 1

1747ASB
Module 1

Logical
Rack 2

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

17

10 7

Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used

OW8
OW16
OG16
OV8
OB16
NO4V
OW16
OV16

Not Used
Not Used

NIO4V
OW16
OG16
OW8
OB16
OA8
OW16
OV16

O:010
O:011
O:012
O:013
O:014
O:015
O:016
O:017
O:020
O:021
O:022
O:023
O:024
O:025
O:026
O:027

1747ASB
Module 1

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

822

Application Examples

1747ASB Module 2 I/O Mapping Details


Because 1747-ASB module 2 is configured for 1/2-slot addressing,
has six logical groups and three slots available for I/O, all of the slots
present are mapped into the PLC-5/40 image. Since slot three cannot
be paired with slot four and only two words of image are available,
slot three has the two words assigned to it.
1747-ASB module 2 is configured for discrete mode operation.
Therefore, all speciality modules that have four or less words of
input and output image are discretely mapped, while all specialty
modules that have more than four words of input image or output
image are block transfer mapped.
Due to slot pairing, a discretely mapped four word analog input and
output module are allowed in one slot pair. The 1746-NI4 module in
slot one uses the four input words assigned to slots one and two. As
a result, slot two cannot use any input image. Conversely, it can use
the four output image words assigned to slots one and two which
then allows the 1746-NO4I output module to be installed in slot two.
Because slot three has two input and output words assigned to it and
the 1746-NIO4I module in slot three requires two input and output
words, the 1746-NIO4I module can be installed in slot three. If a
four word input or output module is installed in slot three, a
1747-ASB module error occurs because only half of the modules
image can be mapped.

PLC Processor Input Image


I:030
I:031
I:032
I:033
I:034
I:035

1747ASB
Module 2

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Logical
Rack 3

Group 4,5

NI4
NI4
NI4
NI4
NIO4I
NIO4I

1746-NI4
1746-NO4I
1746-NIO4I

NI4
NI4
NI4
NI4
NIO4I
NIO4I

PLC Processor Output Image


Bit Number Octal

Group 2,3

10 7

ASB 2

Logical
Rack 3

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5

17

Group 0,1

Bit Number Octal

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5

17

10 7

NO4I
NO4I
NO4I
NO4I
NIO4I
NIO4I

NO4I
NO4I
NO4I
NO4I
NIO4I
NIO4I

O:030
O:031
O:032
O:033
O:034
O:035

1747ASB
Module 2

Application Examples

823

RIO Address Label Examples


Due to the 1747-ASB modules addressing modes and RIO link
operation, the I/O modules controlled by the 1747-ASB module are
addressed by the PLC processor on a logical rack, logical group
basis. A label kit is included with each 1747-ASB module to assist
you in assigning the logical rack and logical group designation for
each I/O module. Refer to chapter 6 for more information regarding
these labels.

The switch is connected


to input 12.
0-7 n
Rack
1
I:
O:
BT

10 - 17 n
Group(s)
G7

Discrete

Remote PLC System

The 0-7 and 10-17


boxes are checked
because the module
requires more than
one byte of image.
The module resides
in the PLC5/40,
Input image (I:),
logical rack 1,
logical group 7.
The discrete box is
checked because
the module's image
is discretely
mapped in the
PLC5/40 image.

The bulb is connected


to output 5.
0-7
Rack
I:
O:
BT

10 - 17 n
Group(s)

G1
Discrete

Remote PLC System

The 10-17 box is


checked because this
module requires the
high byte of the
PLC5/40 image. 0-7
must be converted to
10-17 to correspond
with the PLC5/40
image.
The module resides
in the PLC, Output
image (O:), logical
rack 2, logical
group 1.
The discrete box is
checked because the
module's image is
discretely mapped in
the PLC5/40 image.

9 10

11 12 13

0-7

O:
BT

Rack
2

10 - 17 n
Group(s)
G3

G3

n Discrete

Remote PLC System

The 10-17 box is


checked because this
module requires the
high byte of the
PLC5/40 image.
The module resides
in the PLC, output
image (O:), input
image (I:), logical
rack 2, logical group
3.
The block transfer
box is checked
because the
module's image is
block transfer
mapped into the
PLC5/40 image.

ASB 2
1746NI4
1746NO4I
1746NIO4I

14 15 16

Meter 2 is connected
to output 2.

I:

1746OA8
1746NO4V
1746OW16
1746IA16
1746OV16
1746IV16

PLC5/40

1746OW8
1746OV8
1746OB16
1746IB16

ASB 1
1746NIO4V
1746OW8
1746OW16
1746IA16
1746OG16
1746IG16

Shown below are examples of how the labels are filled out.

Meter 1 is connected
to output 0.
0-7
I:
O:
BT

Rack
3

10 - 17
Group(s)
G0-G3

Discrete

Remote PLC System

0-7
I:
O:
BT

Rack
3
3

10 - 17
Group(s)
G4,G5
G4,G5

Discrete

Remote PLC System

The 0-7 and 10-17


boxes are not
checked because
only words are
considered when this
module is mapped
discretely. The NI4
has four words that
are discretely
mapped into
PLC5/40 image.
The module resides
in the PLC5/40,
Input image (I:),
logical rack 3, logical
groups 0, 1, 2, and 3.
The discrete box is
checked because the
module's image is
discretely mapped in
the PLC5/40 image.

The 0-7 and 10-17


boxes are not checked
because only words
are considered when
this module is mapped
discretely. The NIO4I
has two input and two
output words that are
discretely mapped into
PLC5/40 image.
The module resides in
the PLC5/40, Input (I:)
and Output image (O:),
logical rack 3, logical
groups 4 and 5.
The discrete box is
checked because the
module's image is
discretely mapped in
the PLC5/40 image.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

824

Application Examples

Application Example Program


Shown below is an excerpt from the user program. When the
switch is closed, the bulb illuminates, decimal value 5555 is moved
to the 1746-NO4V output 2 (connected to meter 2) and to the
1746-NIO4I output 0 (connected to meter 1).
The inputs to the 1746IA16 module are in octal. The switch is
wired to input 12 (octal) and its value is represented by bit 12
(octal) in the processor image. Make sure that the octal label kit
16 and 32 point modules are used to convert their LED filters and
wiring labels to octal, for use with the PLC5.

Switch

The 1746NO4V module is block transfer mapped. To write a


value to the module, the data must first be written to the
appropriate word in N10:0-N10:3. This integer file was chosen
as the block transfer data file for the NO4V. N10:2 corresponds
to output 2. The user program must enable the block transfer to
the NO4V using a block transfer instruction. The data is not
transferred until the next RIO block transfer for this module
occurs.

Meter 2

The 1746NIO4I module is discretely mapped. To write a value to


the NIO4I outputs, the value is written to the processor output
image (word O:034 corresponds to output 0 and word O:035
corresponds to output 1). The data is automatically sent to the
processor on the next RIO discrete transfer.

Meter 1

MOV

I:017
] [
12

MOVE
Source

5555

Dest

N10:2

MOV
MOVE
Source

5555

Dest

O:034

O:021
( )
15
BTW

The 1746OV8 module output is in octal. It has been


adjusted because it resides in the high byte of the processor
image. The bulb is wired to output 5 that corresponds to bit 40
(octal) of the processor image.

BLOCK TRNSFR WRITE


Rack
2
Group
3
Module
1
Control Block N7:0
Data File
N10:0
Length
4
Continuous
Y

Bulb

Meter 2 Block
Transfer Instruction

The switch is connected


to input 12.

The bulb is connected


to output 5.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

9 10

Meter 2 is connected
to output 2.

11 12 13

14 15 16

ASB 2
1746NI4
1746NO4I
1746NIO4I

1746OA8
1746NO4V
1746OW16
1746IA16
1746OV16
1746IV16

PLC5/40

1746OW8
1746OV8
1746OB16
1746IB16

ASB 1
1746NIO4V
1746OW8
1746OW16
1746IA16
1746OG16
1746IG16

The following is another representation of what is discussed above.

Meter 1 is connected
to output 0.

Appendix

Specifications
This appendix provides adapter and system specifications, as well as
throughput information. Topics include:
adapter operating specifications
network specifications
throughput introduction
calculating throughput

Adapter Operating
Specifications

Backplane Current Consumption

375mA at 5V

Operating Temperature

32 F to 140 F
(0 C to 60 C)

Storage Temperature

-40 F to +185 F
(-40 C to +85 C)

Humidity

5% to 95% noncondensing

Noise Immunity

NEMA standard ICS 2230

Agency Certification
(when product or packaging is marked)

CSA certified
CSA Class I, Division 2
Groups A, B, C, D certified
UL listed
CE marked for all applicable directives

Network Specifications
Baud Rate Determination of Maximum Cable Length and Terminating Resistor
Size
Baud Rate
U i Extended
E t d d
Using
Node Capability
Not Using
Extended
e ded Node
ode
C bili
Capability

57.6K baud
115.2K baud
230.4K baud
57.6K baud
115.2K baud
230.4K baud

Maximum Cable Distance


(Belden 9463)
3048 meters (10,000 feet)
1524 meters (5,000 feet)
762 meters (2,500 feet)
3048 meters (10,000 feet)
1524 meters (5,000 feet)
762 meters (2,500 feet)

Resistor Size
82 1/2 Watt
150 1/2 Watt
82 1/2 Watt

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

A2

Specifications

Throughput Introduction

Throughput is the time between when a control system senses an


input event on an I/O module in a 1747-ASB chassis to when an
output event occurs on an I/O module within the same 1747-ASB
chassis. There are three types of 1747-ASB module throughput:
discrete throughput (time from discretely mapped input to
discretely mapped output) without block transfers present
discrete throughput (time from discretely mapped input to
discretely mapped output) with block transfers present
block transfer throughput (time from block transfer mapped input
to block transfer mapped output)

Discrete Throughput Overview


The 1747-ASB module system discrete throughput is comprised of:
the total PLC or SLC processor scan time
the total RIO link scan time
1747-ASB module backplane scan time
the scanner module output delay time (only if scanner is a
separate module from the processor, otherwise value is 0)
the scanner module input delay time (only if scanner is a separate
module from the processor, otherwise value is 0)
the input module delay time
the output module delay time
In the example on the following page, the input event occurs at a
discretely mapped I/O module. The input image of I/O module is
read by the 1747-ASB module during a 1747-ASB module
backplane scan. The input data is placed into a buffer, which is next
read by the scanner during a discrete scan of the RIO link. Once the
input data is read by the scanner, it is sent to and read by the PLC or
SLC processor.
The response or output data travels back across the RIO link to the
1747-ASB module during a discrete scan. The 1747-ASB module
writes the output data to a discretely mapped output module during a
1747-ASB module backplane scan. The output data exits the chassis
via the I/O module in order to control the field device.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Specifications

A3

Processor Scan
Scanner Scan
ASB Backplane Scan

Scanner
Processor

ASB Module

I/O Module

I/O Module

RIO Scan
SLC Local Chassis
Outputs to Modules
Remote Chassis

Remote Expansion Chassis

Inputs from Modules

Outputs from Modules

Inputs to Modules

Output Device
Input Device

Processor Scan
Processor/Scanner

ASB Backplane Scan


ASB Module

I/O Module

I/O Module

RIO Scan
PLC Local Chassis

Outputs to Modules
Remote Chassis
Inputs from Modules
Inputs to Modules

Remote Expansion Chassis


Outputs from Modules

Output Device
Input Device

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

A4

Specifications

Calculating Throughput

The 1747-ASB module throughput is determined by more than the


1747-ASB module itself. The input and output module delays,
scanner scan time, and processor scan time contribute to throughput
as well.

Discrete I/O Throughput without Block Transfers Present


The information in this section is used to calculate the discrete
throughput of the 1747-ASB module if both conditions are true:
There are no block transfer mapped I/O modules in the
1747-ASB chassis.
There are no RIO block transfers occurring on the RIO link to
any chassis.
If RIO block transfers are present on the RIO link or if the
1747-ASB chassis has block transfer mapped I/O modules, you must
use the Discrete I/O Throughput with Block Transfers Present
section.
The formula to calculate the maximum 1747-ASB module discrete
I/O throughput without block transfers present is:
Tdmnbt = 2Tps + 2TRIO + 2Tbp + TSNo + TSNi + Tid + Tod + 10ms
Tdmnbt = The maximum 1747ASB module discrete throughput without block transfers in
milliseconds (ms)
The value of 10ms is for PLC5/11, 5/20, 5/30, 5/40, and 5/60 processors only. For all other
processors the value is not used.

To calculate throughput, substitute values for the variables in the


formula above. Locate these values in the following documents:
Variable

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Variable Description

Location of Variable

Tps

The total processor scan time


(ms)

PLC or SLC programming


manual

TSNi

The scanner module input


delay time (ms) (only if scanner
is a separate module,
otherwise value is 0)

scanner user manual

TSNo

The scanner module output


delay time (ms) (only if scanner
is a separate module,
otherwise value is 0)

scanner user manual

Tid

The input delay time (ms)

SLC I/O product data and I/O


instruction sheets

Tod

The output delay time (ms)

SLC I/O product data and I/O


instruction sheets

TRIO

The total RIO scan time (ms)

page A-5 of this manual

Tbp

1747ASB module backplane


scan time (ms)

page A-6 of this manual

Specifications

A5

RIO Scan Time Calculation (TRIO)


The RIO scan time is calculated by identifying the baud rate and
image size of each logical device on the RIO link. Locate the
corresponding time value in the following table. If you are using
multiple logical devices, add the time values together to determine
the total RIO scan time (TRIO).
TRIO = Tadapter 1 + Tadapter 2 + Tadapter 3
RIO Scan Times for Adapters
Adapter
Size

Baud Rate
57.6K

115.2K

230.4K

1/4 logical
rack

6.0ms

3.5ms

2.5ms

1/2 logical
rack

6.5ms

4.0ms

2.75ms

3/4 logical
rack

7.5ms

4.5ms

3.0ms

Full logical
rack

9.5ms

5.5ms

3.5ms

The table shown above is based on PLC5 processors. If another type of processor is used, refer
to its user manual for TRIO.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

A6

Specifications

1747ASB Module Backplane Scan Time (Tbp)


The 1747-ASB module backplane scan time is determined by the
type of I/O modules in the 1747-ASB chassis and the baud rate. To
calculate the 1747-ASB module backplane scan time (Tbp), first add
the I/O module scan times together to determine the base backplane
scan time (Tb):
Tb(Tbase backplane scan time) = TI/O module1 + TI/O module 2
Only modules mapped to the 1747ASB image; unmapped modules are not scanned.

Locate the appropriate I/O module scan times in the following table:
Backplane Scan Times (Tb)

4 point input

Scan Time
(ms)
0.210

8 point input

0.210

16 point input

0.325

32 point input

0.560

2 word specialty input

0.625

4 word specialty input

1.100

6 word specialty input

1.575

8 word specialty input

2.048

4 point output

0.170

8 point output

0.170

16 point output

0.273

32 point output

0.470

2 word specialty output

0.620

4 word specialty output

1.028

6 word specialty output

1.440

8 word specialty output

1.745

4, 6, and 12 point combination

0.380

I/O Module

Now substitute the base backplane scan time (Tb) into the
appropriate equation, based on your baud rate, to solve for the
1747-ASB module backplane scan time (Tbp):

57.6K baud

1747ASB Module Backplane Scan


Time (Tbp)
1.15Tb + 1.38

115.2K baud

1.32Tb + 1.58

230.4K baud

1.67Tb + 2.00

Baud Rate

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Specifications

A7

Discrete I/O Throughput without Block Transfers Present Example


A PLC 5/40 is controlling an RIO link running at 115.2K baud that
has the following adapters:
One 1747-ASB module configured as 1/2 logical rack with 1-slot
addressing and discrete specialty I/O mode
slot 1 - 1746IB16, 16 point input module
slot 2 - 1746OB16, 16 point output module
slot 3 - 1746NIO4I, 2 input/ 2 output analog module

Two adapters, each configured as a full logical rack


Three adapters, each configured as a 1/4 logical rack
1. Use the throughput formula to calculate the maximum
throughput.
Tdmnbt = 2Tps + 2TRIO + 2Tbp + TSNo + TSNi + Tid + Tod + 10ms
Tdmnbt = The maximum 1747ASB module discrete throughput without block transfers in
milliseconds (ms)
Tps = 25.0 ms, which is from the PLC 5/40 programming manual
TRIO = The total RIO scan time (ms)
Tbp = 1747ASB module backplane scan time (ms)
TSNo = 0 since you are using a PLC processor with a built in scanner
TSNi= 0 since you are using a PLC processor with a built in scanner
Tid = 10.0 ms, which is from I/O module instruction sheets
Tod = 1.0 ms, which is from I/O module instruction sheets

Tdmnbt = 2(25) + 2TRIO + 2Tbp + 0 + 0 + 10.0 + 1.0 + 10ms

2. Since there are two unknown values, continue with steps three
through seven on the following page.
3. Calculate the 1747-ASB module backplane scan time (Tbp).
Determine the backplane scan time for each module in slots one,
two, and three.
slot 1 - 1747IB16, 16 point input module = .325ms
slot 2 - 1747OB16, 16 point output module = .273ms
slot 3 - 1746NIO4I, 2 input/ 2 output analog module = input = .625ms
output = .620ms
These values are listed in the Backplane Scan Time table on the page A-6.
The value of 10ms is for PLC5/11, 5/20, 5/30, 5/40, and 5/60 processors only. For all other
PLC5 processors the value is not required.
Since the 1746NIO4I has both input and output image, each amount is needed to calculate base
backplane scan time (Tb).

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

A8

Specifications

4. Add the backplane scan times together for each module in slots
one, two, and three.
Tbase backplane scan time (Tb) = TI/O module1 + TI/O module 2 + TI/O module 3
Tb= .325ms + .273ms + .625ms + .620ms
Tb= 1.843ms

5. Use the appropriate Total Backplane Scan Time formula found on


page A6 to calculate the total backplane scan time.
Tbp = 1.32Tb + 1.58
Tbp = 1.32(1.843ms) + 1.58
Tbp = 4.01ms

6. Calculate the total RIO scan time (TRIO). Locate the baud rate
(115.2K)and adapter size which is found in the table on page
A5. Multiply the RIO scan times listed under the 115.2K
heading by the number of each different type of rack that you
have. Add those numbers together:
TRIO = Tadapter 1 + Tadapter 2 + Tadapter 3
TRIO = 1(4.0ms) + 2(5.0ms) + 3(3.5ms)
TRIO = 24.5ms

7. Substitute all the values for variables in the throughput formula


and solve for throughput:
Tdmnbt = 2Tps + 2TRIO + 2Tbp + TSNo + TSNi + Tid + Tod + 10ms
Tdmnbt = 2(25)+ 2(24.5) + 2(4.01) + 0 + 0 + 10.0 + 1.0 + 10
Tdmnbt = 128.02 ms = maximum throughput

Discrete I/O Throughput with Block Transfers Present


The information in this section is used to calculate the discrete
throughput of the 1747-ASB module if either of the following
conditions are true:
There are block transfer mapped I/O modules in the 1747-ASB
chassis.
There are RIO block transfers occurring on the RIO link to any
chassis.
If RIO block transfers not are present on the RIO link or if the
1747-ASB chassis has no block transfer mapped I/O modules, you
must use the Discrete I/O Throughput without Block Transfers
Present section.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Specifications

A9

To calculate discrete I/O throughput with block transfers present, use


the following formula:
Tdmbt = Tdmnbt + 2Tbtx
Tdm-bt = The maximum 1747-ASB module discrete throughput with block transfers
in
milliseconds (ms)
Tdm-nbt = The maximum 1747-ASB module discrete throughput without block
transfers in milliseconds (ms)
Tbtx = Additional time due to sending any RIO block transfer data on the RIO link

Important: You will need to use the backplane scan times located in
the top table on page A6. You must include the time
necessary to scan all the words of all the I/O modules in
the 1747-ASB chassis, including the block transfer
mapped I/O modules. For example, if a 1746-BAS
module is used, (Tb) must include the time needed to
scan 8 input and 8 output words even though the
1746-BAS module consumes only 2 bytes in the
1747-ASB image.
Before determining (Tbtx), you need to establish the maximum block
transfer write or read length that is to be processed by each logical
device on the RIO link including the 1747-ASB module.
RIO scan time is increased each time an RIO block transfer is sent to
any logical device on the RIO network even if it is not sent to the
1747-ASB module. The scan time increase depends on the number
of words sent in the block transfer and the selected baud rate. RIO
link protocol allows for a maximum of one RIO block transfer to be
sent to each logical device on the RIO link during any single RIO
scan. The RIO scan increase (Tri) for each logical device is:
Baud Rate

RIO Scan Time Increase (Tri)

57.6K baud

0.300 x block transfer length + 5.0ms

115.2K baud

0.150 x block transfer length + 3.5ms

230.4K baud

0.075 x block transfer length + 2.0ms

The total increase in the RIO scan time (Tbtx) is equal to:
Tbtx = sum of Tri for all logical devices

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

A10

Specifications

Discrete I/O Throughput with Block Transfers Present Example


A PLC 5/40 is controlling a 115.2K baud RIO link that has 3
adapters and 4 logical devices.
1747-ASB module:
starting logical rack 0, logical group 0
12 logical groups (1 1/2 logical racks)
one 8 word and two 4 word block transfer write/read modules in
logical rack 0
one 2 word block transfer write/read module in logical rack 1
1771-ASB module:
starting logical rack 2, logical group 0
2 logical groups (1/4 logical racks)
one 64 word block transfer write/read module
1771-ASB module
starting logical rack 2, logical group 2
2 logical groups (1/4 logical racks)
one 64 word block transfer write/read module
1. Tdm-nbt equals 80ms for a specific pair of discretely mapped
input and output modules. The maximum throughput for these
discretely mapped I/O modules when block transfers are present
are:
Tdmbt = Tdmnbt + 2Tbtx
Tdmbt = 80ms + 2Tbtx
This number is arbitrarily assigned.

2. Determine the maximum length of the block transfer to each


logical device. There are two logical devices for the 1747-ASB
module. The largest block transfer that is possible with the full
logical rack, logical device is 8 words. The largest block transfer
that is possible with the 1/2 logical rack, logical device is 2
words.
3. Substitute the maximum length of each logical device into:
Tri = 0.150 x block transfer length + 3.5ms
Tri = (0.150 x 8 ) + 3.5ms
Tri1 = 4.7ms
Tri = (0.150 x 2 ) + 3.5ms
Tri2 = 3.8ms

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Specifications

A11

4. There is one logical device for each 1771-ASB module. The


largest block transfer for 1/4 logical racks is 64 words. Calculate
the maximum length for these logical devices:
Tri = 0.150 x block transfer length + 3.5ms
Tri = (0.150 x 64 ) + 3.5ms
Tri3 & 4 = 13.1ms

5. Add up all of the maximum word lengths:


Tbtx = Tri1 +Tri2 + Tri3 + Tri4
Tbtx = 4.7+ 3.8 + 13.1 + 13.1
Tbtx = 34.7ms

6. Substitute all the values for variables in the throughput formula


and solve for throughput:
Tdmbt = Tdmnbt + 2Tbtx
Tdmbt = 80ms + 2(34.7)ms
Tdmbt = 149.4ms

Block Transfer Throughput


Block transfer throughput is always slower than discrete data
transfer. It is dependent on the time involved for the:
PLC control program to enable the block transfer
PLC to generate a request for a block transfer
1747-ASB module to acknowledge the request
PLC to initiate the block transfer
time involved to block transfer the data
1747-ASB backplane scan

This is dependent on the PLC processor and scanner.


Once the block transfer is request is received, the acknowledgement occurs in no more than one
backplane scan and two RIO scans.
The time involved to block transfer data is calculated using the T formula in the previous section.
ri
The 1747ASB backplane scan time is calculated in the same manner as described in the discrete
throughput sections.

As noted above, block transfer timing is PLC dependent. To


calculate block transfer throughput, refer to the applicable PLC
programming document.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Appendix

Understanding Your
SLC 500/1746 Control System
This appendix provides information on using SLC 500/1746 control
systems. Topics include:
selecting your SLC 500/1746 control power supply
system installation recommendations
mounting your control system
installing your I/O modules
wiring the I/O modules
calculating heat dissipation for your control system

Selecting Your SLC 500/1746


Control Power Supply

When configuring a modular system, you must have an individual


power supply for each chassis. Careful system configuration will
result in the best performance. Excessive loading of the power
supply outputs can cause a power supply shutdown or premature
failure. All power supplies are protected by a replaceable fuse
except for the 1746-P4.
There are three different ac power supplies and one dc power supply.
For ac power supplies, the 120/240V selection is made by a jumper.
Place the jumper to match the input voltage. The power supply has
an LED that illuminates when the power supply is functioning
properly. Following are the general specifications for the power
supplies.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

B2

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Power Supply Specifications


Description

1746P1

1746P2

1746P3

1746P4

Line Voltage

85-132/170-265V ac
47-63 Hz

85-132/170-265V ac
47-63 Hz

19.2-28.8V dc

85-132/170-265V ac
47-63 Hz

Typical Line Power


Requirement

135 VA

180 VA

90 VA

240 VA

Maximum Inrush
Current

20A

20A

20A

45A

Internal Current
Capacity

2A at 5V dc
0.46A at 24V dc

5A at 5V dc
0.96A at 24V dc

3.6A at 5V dc
0.87A at 24V dc

10.0A at 5V dc
2.88A at 24V dc

Fuse Protection

1746F1 or equivalent:
250V-3A Fuse
Nagasawa
ULCS61ML3
or BUSSMANN AGC 3

1746F2 or equivalent:
250V-3A Fuse
SANO SOC SD4 or
BUSSMANN AGC 3

1746F3 or equivalent:
125V-5A Fuse
Nagasawa
ULCS61ML5
or BUSSMAN AGC 5

Nonreplaceable fuse is
soldered in place.

24V dc User Power


Current Capacity

200 mA

200 mA

NA

1A

24V dc User Power


Voltage Range

18-30V dc

18-30V dc

NA

20.4-27.6V dc

Ambient Operating
Temperature
Rating

0 C to 60 C (32 F to 140 F)
(Current capacity derated 5% above 55 C)

Storage
Temperature

-40 C to 85 C (-40 F to 185 F)

Humidity Rating

5-95% (noncondensing)

Wiring

two 2mm2 cross section (#14 AWG) wires per terminal (maximum)

Agency
Certification
(when product or
packaging is
marked)

CSA certified
CSA Class I, Division 2
Groups A, B, C, D certified
UL listed
CE marked for all applicable directives

Hazardous
Environment
Certification

Class I Division 2

Class I Division 2

0 C to 60 C
(32 F to 140 F)
no derating

Class I Division 2

Pending

NA (Not Applicable)

Refer to page B-30 to determine line power requirements for your configuration.
The combination of all output power (5V backplane, 24V backplane, and 24V user source) cannot
exceed 70W.

Power supply fuse is intended to guard against fire hazard due to short circuit conditions and may
not protect the supply from damage under overload conditions.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

B3

Example for Selecting a 1746 Power Supply


Select a power supply for chassis 1 and chassis 2 for the control
system below. (The worksheets for this example start on
page B5.)
Chassis 1

IBM PC

Chassis 2

?
Catalog Number
1747AIC

Slot

?
0 1 2 3

Slot

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

RIO Link

DH485 Network

Chassis 1 Contains:
Slot
Number

Description

Catalog
Number

Power Supply at
5V dc (Amps)

Power Supply at
24V dc (Amps)

Processor Unit

1747L524

0.35

0.105

Remote I/O Scanner

1747SN

0.90

NA

Transistor Output Module

1746OB8

0.135

NA

Triac Output Module

1746OA16

0.37

NA

Peripheral
device

Isolated Link Coupler

1747AIC

NA

0.085

1.755

0.190

Total Current:

Power Supply 1746P1 is sufficient for Chassis #1. The Internal Current Capacity" for this power
supply is 2 Amps at 5V dc, 0.46 Amps at 24V dc.

Chassis 2 Contains:
Slot
Number

Description

Catalog
Number

Power Supply at
5V dc (Amps)

Power Supply at
24V dc (Amps)

Remote I/O Adapter

1747ASB

0.375

NA

Input Module

1746IA16

0.085

NA

Input Module

1746IA16

0.085

NA

Relay Output Modules

1746OB32

0.452

NA

Relay Output Modules

1746OB32

0.452

NA

Relay Output Modules

1746OB32

0.452

NA

Combination Module

1746IO12

0.09

0.07

1.991

0.07

Total Current:

Power Supply 1746P2 is sufficient for Chassis #2. The Internal Current Capacity" for this power
supply is 5 Amps at 5V dc, 0.96 Amps at 24V dc.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

B4

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Example Worksheet for Selecting a 1746 Power Supply


Procedure
1. For each slot of the chassis that contains a module, list the slot number, the catalog number of the module, and its 5V and 24V
maximum currents.
1
Chassis Number: _______

2
Chassis Number: _______

Catalog
Number
slot
slot
slot
slot
slot
slot
slot
slot

_______
0
_______
1
_______
2
_______
3
_______
_______
_______
_______

Peripheral
Device

Maximum Currents
5V
24V

_________
L524
_________
SN
_________
OB8
_________
OA16
_________
_________
_________
_________

______________
0.350 0.105
______________
0.900 NA
______________
0.135 NA
______________
0.370 NA
______________
______________
______________
______________

slot
slot
slot
slot
slot
slot
slot
slot

_________
AIC

______________
NA
0.190

Peripheral
Device

_______
0
_______
1
_______
2
_______
3
_______
4
_______
5
_______
6
_______

Catalog
Number

Maximum Currents
5V
24V

_________
ASB
_________
IA16
_________
IA16
_________
OB32
_________
OB32
_________
OB32
_________
IO12
_________

______________
0.375
NA
______________
0.085
NA
______________
0.085
NA
______________
0.452
NA
______________
0.452
NA
______________
0.452
NA
______________
0.090 0.070
______________

_________

______________

2. Add the power supply loading currents of


all the system devices ( at 5V and 24V).
Total Current:

___________
1.755

Total Current:

0.190

___________
1.991

0.070

When using the 1746-P4 power supply, use the formula below to calculate
total power consumption of all the system devices (at 5V and 24V). Note that
the 1746-P4 total power supply loading currents cannot exceed 70 Watts. If
you are not using a 1746-P4 power supply, proceed to step 3.
The user current @ 24V listed below is for example only. The current
required depends on the application.
Total current
@ 5V

x 5V) +

Total current
@ 24V

User Current
@ 24V

x24V) +

Total Power

x 24V) =

Total current
@ 5V

x 5V) + (

Total current
@ 24V

User Current
@ 24V

x 24V) +

Total Power

x 24V) =

3. Compare the Total Current required for the chassis with the Internal Current Capacity of the power supplies.
To select the proper power supply for your chassis, make sure that the power supply loading current for the chassis is less than the
internal current capacity for the power supply, for both 5V and 24V loads.

Catalog Number 1746P1


Catalog Number 1746P2
Catalog Number 1746P3
Catalog Number 1746P4
Required Power Supply for this Chassis:

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

1746

P1

Internal Current Capacity


5V
24V
2.0A
|
0.46A
5.0A
|
0.96A
3.6A
|
0.87A
10.0A
|
2.88A (70W maximum)
Required Power Supply for this Chassis:

1746

P2

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

B5

Worksheet for Selecting a 1746 Power Supply


Make copies of this worksheet as needed. For a detailed list of device load currents, refer to the SLC 500
price sheet, product instruction sheet, or appropriate product data.
Procedure
1. For each slot of the chassis that contains a module, list the slot number, the catalog number of the module, and its 5V and 24V
maximum currents.
Chassis Number: _______

Chassis Number: _______

Catalog
Number
slot
slot
slot
slot
slot
slot
slot
slot

_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______

Peripheral
Device

Maximum Currents
5V
24V

_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________

______________
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________

slot
slot
slot
slot
slot
slot
slot
slot

_________

______________

Peripheral
Device

_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______

Catalog
Number

Maximum Currents
5V
24V

_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________

______________
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________

_________

______________

2. Add the power supply loading currents of


all the system devices ( at 5V and 24V).
Total Current:

___________

Total Current:

___________

When using the 1746-P4 power supply, use the formula below to calculate
total power consumption of all the system devices (at 5V and 24V). Note that
the 1746-P4 total power supply loading currents cannot exceed 70 Watts. If
you are not using a 1746-P4 power supply, proceed to step 3.
The user current @ 24V listed below is for example only. The current
required depends on the application.
Total current
@ 5V

x 5V) +

Total current
@ 24V

User Current
@ 24V

x24V) +

Total Power

x 24V) =

Total current
@ 5V

x 5V) + (

User Current
@ 24V

Total current
@ 24V

x 24V) +

Total Power

x 24V) =

3. Compare the Total Current required for the chassis with the Internal Current Capacity of the power supplies.
To select the proper power supply for your chassis, make sure that the power supply loading current for the chassis is less than the
internal current capacity for the power supply, for both 5V and 24V loads.

Catalog Number 1746P1


Catalog Number 1746P2
Catalog Number 1746P3
Catalog Number 1746P4
Required Power Supply for this Chassis:

1746

Internal Current Capacity


5V
24V
2.0A
|
0.46A
5.0A
|
0.96A
3.6A
|
0.87A
10.0A
|
2.88A (70W maximum)
Required Power Supply for this Chassis:

1746

Consider future system expansion when selecting a power supply.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

B6

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

SLC 500 System


Installation
Recommendations

This section provides specific recommendations to help you install


your SLC 500/1746 components. For general installation guidelines,
also refer to the requirements specific to your region.
Europe: Reference the standards found in EN 60204 and your
national regulations.
United States: Refer to article 70E of the National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA). It describes electrical safety
requirements for employee workplaces.

Typical Installation
The figure below consists of some components that make up a
typical installation.
1
2
1
2
3

An IEC or NEMArated enclosure suitable for


your application and environment that shields
your adapter from electrical noise and airborne
contaminants
Disconnect device that allows you to remove power
from the system
Fused isolation transformer or a constant voltage
transformer, as your application requires

Disconnect Device

4
MCR
6
3

Isolation Transformer

Master control relay/emergencystop circuit

Terminal blocks or wiring ducts

Suppression devices for limiting electromagnetic


interference (EMI) generation

SLC 500 Chassis

Selecting an Enclosure
The enclosure protects the equipment from atmospheric
contamination. Standards established by the International
Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) and National Electrical
Manufacturers Association (NEMA) define enclosure types based
on the degree of protection an enclosure will provide. Select an IECor NEMA-rated enclosure that suits your application and
environment.
The enclosure should be equipped with a disconnect device. To
calculate the heat dissipation of your controller, refer to Calculating
Heat Dissipation on page B30.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

B7

Spacing Considerations
Up to three chassis can be connected (for a maximum of 30 I/O
slots). Follow the recommended minimum spacing shown below to
allow for convection cooling within the enclosure.
Important:

Be careful of metal chips when drilling mounting holes


for the chassis. Do not drill holes above a mounted
control system.

1746C9 Cable

1746C7 Cable

1746C9
Cable

1746C9
Cable

Recommended Spacing

15.3 to 20 cm (6 to 8 in.) when using the 1746C9 cable


Important: When making a vertical connection between two A13 chassis with a
1746C9 cable, you must limit the space to 15.3 cm (6 in.) for the C9 cable to reach
from chassis to chassis.

Greater than 10.2 cm (4 in.)

Greater than 15.3 cm (6 in.)

7.7 to 10.2 cm (3 to 4 in.) when using the 1746C7 cable

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

B8

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Preventing Excessive Heat


For most applications, normal convection cooling will keep the
adapter components within the specified operating range of 0 to
+60 C (+32 to +140 F). Proper spacing of components within the
enclosure is usually sufficient for heat dissipation.
In some applications, a substantial amount of heat is produced by
other equipment inside or outside the enclosure. In this case, place
blower fans inside the enclosure to assist in air circulation and to
reduce hot spots near the adapter.
Additional cooling provisions might be necessary when high ambient
temperatures are encountered.
Important:

Do not bring in unfiltered outside air. It may introduce


harmful contaminants of dirt that could cause improper
operation or damage to components. In extreme cases,
you may need to use air conditioning to protect against
heat build-up within the enclosure.

Wiring Layout
Careful wire routing within the enclosure helps to cut down electrical
noise between I/O lines. Follow these rules for routing your wires:
Route incoming power to the power supply by a separate path
from wiring to I/O devices. Where paths must cross, their
intersection should be perpendicular.
Important:

Do not run signal or communications wiring and


power wiring in the same conduit.

If wiring ducts are used, allow for at least 5 cm (2 in.) between


I/O wiring ducts and the adapter. If the terminal strips are used
for I/O wiring, allow for at least 5 cm (2 in.) between the terminal
strips and the adapter.
Limit the cable length for the TTL input module to 15 m (50 ft)
per point and 3 m (10 ft) per point for the TTL output module.
Use low power dc I/O wiring even though it is less tolerant to
electrical noise.

ATTENTION: Handle the TTL module by its


ends, not metallic surfaces. Electrostatic discharges
can damage the module. Do not expose the TTL
module to electrostatic charges.

Segregate I/O wiring by signal type. Bundle wiring with similar


electrical characteristics together.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

B9

Wires with different signal characteristics should be routed into the


enclosure by separate paths. Refer to Allen-Bradley Programmable
Controller Grounding and Wiring Guidelines, Publication Number
1770-4.1.

ATTENTION: United States Only: If the adapter is


being installed within a potentially hazardous
environment (i.e., Class I, Division 2), all wiring must
comply with the requirements stated in the National
Electrical Code 501-4 (b).

Grounding Guidelines
In solid-state control systems, grounding helps limit the effects of
electrical noise due to electromagnetic interference (EMI). The
ground path for the adapter and its enclosure is provided by the
equipment grounding conductor.
Normal Electrical Noise Conditions

Severe Electrical Noise Conditions


5.2 mm2 (10 AWG)
to Ground Bus

Chassis
Mounting Tab
Size M4 or M5
(#10 or #12)
Internal Star
Washer

Size M4 or M5
(#10 or #12)
Hardware

Chassis Mounting Tab

Ground
Lug

Size M4 or M5
(#10 or #12)
Hardware

Size M4 or M5
(#10 or #12)
Internal Star
Washers

Tapped Hole
(Minimum of Three
Threads)
Scrape paint off panel to insure
electrical connection between
chassis
and grounded metal panel.

Metal Panel
(Must be connected to
earth ground.)

Tapped Hole
(Minimum of
Three Threads)
Scrape paint off panel to insure
electrical connection between chassis
and grounded metal panel.

Metal Panel
(Must be connected to
earth ground.)

ATTENTION: The 1746 chassis, the enclosure, and


other control devices must be properly grounded. All
applicable codes and ordinances must be observed
when wiring the adapter system.

Ground connections should run from the chassis and power supply of
each chassis and expansion unit to the ground bus. Exact
connections will differ between applications.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

B10

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Europe: Reference EN 60204 for safety information on grounding.


Also, refer to Allen-Bradley Programmable Controller Grounding
and Wiring Guidelines, Publication Number 1770-4.1.
United States: An authoritative source on grounding requirements
for most installations is the National Electrical Code. Also, refer to
Allen-Bradley Programmable Controller Grounding and Wiring
Guidelines, Publication Number 1770-4.1.
In addition to the grounding required for the adapter and its
enclosure, you must also provide proper grounding for all controlled
devices in your application. Care must be taken to provide each
device with an acceptable grounding path.
This figure shows you how to run ground connections from the
chassis to the ground bus. Two acceptable grounding methods are
shown; we recommend using a ground bus because it reduces the
electrical resistance at the connection.

Earth Ground

5.2 mm2 (10 AWG)


2 mm2
(14 AWG)

2 mm2
(14 AWG)

Note: Keep wire


length as short as
possible.

2 mm2
(14 AWG)

Preferred Grounding Method


5.2 mm2 (10 AWG)

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

B11

Master Control Relay


A hard-wired master control relay (supplied by user) provides a
convenient means for emergency shutdown. Since the master
control relay allows the placement of several Emergency-Stop
switches in different locations, its installation is important from a
safety standpoint. Overtravel limit switches or mushroom head push
buttons are wired in series so that when any of them opens, the
master control relay is de-energized. This removes power to input
and output device circuits.

!
Important:

ATTENTION: Never alter these circuits to defeat


their function, since serious injury and/or machine
damage could result.

If you are using a dc power supply, interrupt the dc side


rather than the ac side to avoid the additional delay of
power supply turn-on and turn-off. The dc power
supply should receive its power directly from the fused
secondary of the transformer. Connect the power to the
dc input and output circuits through a set of master
control relay contacts.

Place the main power disconnect switch where operators and


maintenance personnel have quick and easy access to it. If you
mount a disconnect switch inside the system enclosure, place the
switch operating handle on the outside of the enclosure, so that you
can disconnect power without opening the enclosure.
Whenever any of the emergency-stop switches are opened, power to
input and output devices is stopped.
When you use the master control relay to remove power from the
external I/O circuits, power continues to be provided to the systems
power supply so that diagnostic indicators on the processor can still
be observed.
The master control relay is not a substitute for a disconnect to the
controller. It is intended for any situation where the operator must
quickly de-energize I/O devices only. When inspecting or installing
terminal connections, replacing output fuses, or working on
equipment within the enclosure, use the disconnect to shut off power
to the rest of the system.
Important:

The operator must not control the master control relay


with the processor. Provide the operator with the safety
of a direct connection between an emergency stop
switch and the master control relay.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

B12

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

EmergencyStop Switches
Adhere to the following points concerning Emergency-Stop
switches:
Do not program Emergency-Stop switches in the program. Any
Emergency Stop switch should turn off all machine power by
turning off the master control relay.
Observe all applicable local codes concerning the placement and
labeling of Emergency-Stop switches.
Install Emergency-Stop switches and the master control relay in
your system. Make certain that relay contacts have a sufficient
rating for your application. Emergency-Stop switches must be
easy to reach. See the following schematics.
Important: The illustrations only show output circuits with MCR
protection. In most applications input circuits do not
require MCR protection; however, if you need to
remove power from all field devices, you must include
MCR contacts in series with input power wiring.
Schematic (Using IEC Symbols)
L1

L2
230V ac
Disconnect

Fuse

MCR
230V ac
Output Circuits

Isolation
Transformer
X1

115V ac

X2

Operation of either of these contacts will


remove power from the adapter external I/O
circuits, stopping machine motion.
EmergencyStop
Push Button

Fuse

Overtravel
Limit Switch

Stop

Master Control Relay (MCR)


Cat. No. 700PK400A1
Suppressor
Cat. No. 700N24

Start

MCR
Suppr.

MCR
MCR

115V ac
Output Circuits
dc Power Supply.
Use IEC 950/EN 60950

(Lo)

MCR

(Hi)

Incoming Line Terminals. Connect to


115V ac terminals of Power Supply.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Incoming line terminals. Connect to


24V dc terminals of Power Supply.

24V dc
Output
Circuits

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

B13

Schematic (Using ANSI/CSA Symbols)


L1

L2
230V ac
Disconnect

Fuse

MCR
230V ac
Output Circuits

Isolation
Transformer
X1

115V ac
Fuse

X2

Operation of either of these contacts will


remove power from the adapter external I/O
circuits, stopping machine motion.
EmergencyStop
Push Button

Overtravel
Limit Switch

Stop

Start

Master Control Relay (MCR)


Cat. No. 700PK400A1
Suppressor
Cat. No. 700N24
MCR
Suppr.

MCR
MCR

115V ac
Output Circuits
dc Power Supply.
Use N.E.C. Class 2
for UL Listing.
+

(Lo)

MCR

(Hi)

Incoming Line Terminals. Connect to


115V ac terminals of Power Supply.

Incoming line terminals. Connect to


24V dc terminals of Power Supply.

24V dc
Output
Circuits

Common Power Source


We strongly recommend that all chassis power supplies have the
same power source as the input and output devices. This helps
reduce the chance of electrical interference due to multiple sources
and grounds, as well as helps maintain system integrity if power is
interrupted.
If you do not use a common power source, you need to apply power
to the expansion chassis before you apply power to the chassis
containing the adapter to avoid an unwanted fault. That is, if the
adapter detects the absence of power to any chassis in the system, the
STAT LED turns on and all adapter outputs are de-energized.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

B14

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Loss of Power Source


The chassis power supplies are designed to withstand brief power
losses without affecting the operation of the system. The time the
system is operational during power loss is called Scan Hold-up time
after Loss of Power. The duration of the power supply hold-up time
depends on the number, type and state of the I/O modules, but is
typically between 20 ms and 3 s. When the duration of power loss
reaches this limit, the power supply signals can no longer provide
adequate dc power to the system. This is referred to as a power
supply shutdown. The power supply LED is turned off.
In multi-chassis systems, power outages of 20 to 300 ms in duration
can cause a power fail error to occur. You can clear this error by
cycling power to your system.

Input States on Power Down


The power supply hold-up time as described above is generally
longer than the turn-on and turn-off times of the input modules.
Because of this, the input state change from On to Off that
occurs when power is removed may be recorded by the 1747-ASB
and sent to the processor before the power supply shuts down the
system. Understanding this concept is important. The user program
should be written to take this effect into account. For example, hard
wire power to one spare input. In the user program, check to be sure
that one input is On; otherwise, jump to the end of the program and
avoid scanning the logic. Use of a common power source as
recommended in the previous section is assumed.

Other Types of Line Conditions


Occasionally the power source to the system can be temporarily
interrupted. It is also possible that the voltage level drops
substantially below the normal line voltage range for a period of
time. Both of these conditions are considered to be a loss of power
for the system.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

B15

Power Conditioning Considerations


There are two types of power conditioning considerations: isolation
and suppression.
Isolation
If there is high frequency conducted noise in or around your
distribution equipment, we recommend the use of an isolation
transformer in the ac line to the power supply. This type of
transformer provides isolation from your power distribution system
and is often used as a step down transformer to reduce line
voltage. Any transformer used with the adapter must have a
sufficient power rating for its load. This power rating is generally
expressed in volt-amperes (VA).
To select an appropriate isolation transformer, you must calculate the
power required by the chassis power supply (or supplies if the
system has expansion chassis) and any input circuits and output
loads that are connected through this transformer.
The power requirement for the input circuits is determined by the
number of inputs, the operating voltage, and the nominal input
current. The power requirement for output loads is determined by
the number of outputs, the load voltage, and load current.
For example, if you have a 1746-P1 power supply, 1746-IV16
16-point dc input module (0.012A at 24V dc) and a 1746-OV16
16-point dc transistor sink output module (0.5A at 24V dc), the
power consumed would be:
230 VA + (16)(24V)(0.012A) + (16)(24V)(0.5A) = 426.6 VA

Important:

In this case, 0.5A is the maximum rating of the


transistor sink output (at 30 C). If your load draws less
than 0.5A, this figure may be reduced accordingly. The
output portion of the VA calculation should reflect the
current requirements of your loads.

In general, we recommend that the transformer is oversized to


provide some margin for line voltage variations and other factors.
Typically a transformer that is 25% larger than the calculated VA is
sufficient.
Suppression
Most industrial environments are susceptible to power transients or
spikes. To help insure fault-free operation and protection of
equipment, we recommend suppression devices on power to the
equipment in addition to the isolation equipment.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

B16

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Special Considerations
The recommendations given previously will provide favorable
operating conditions for most adapter installations. Your application
may involve one or more of the following adverse conditions.
Additional measures can be taken to minimize the effect of these
conditions.
Excessive Line Voltage Variations
The best solution for excessive line voltage variation is to correct
any feeder problems in your distribution system. Where this does
not solve the line variation problem, or in certain critical
applications, use a constant voltage transformer. If you require a
constant voltage transformer, connect it to the power supply and all
input devices connected to the 1747-ASB chassis.
Connect output devices on the same power line, but their connection
along the power line is normally made before the constant voltage
transformer. A constant voltage transformer must have a sufficient
power rating for its load.
Excessive Noise
When you operate the 1747-ASB module in a noise polluted
industrial environment, special consideration should be given to
possible electrical interference.
The following reduces the effect of electrical interference:
1747-ASB design features
proper mounting of adapter within an enclosure
proper equipment grounding
proper routing of wiring
proper suppression added to noise generating devices
Inductive loads, such as relays, solenoids, and motor starters, when
operated by hard contacts like push buttons or selector switches,
generate surges on the ac line. Suppression may be necessary when
such loads are connected as output devices or when connected to the
same supply line that powers the adapter.
Lack of surge suppression on inductive loads may contribute to
faults and sporadic operation, RAM can be corrupted (lost), and I/O
modules may appear to be faulty or reset themselves.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

B17

If you connect a 1746 triac output module to control an inductive


load, we recommend that you use varistors for surge suppression.
Choose a varistor that is appropriate for the application. The surge
suppressors we recommend for triac outputs when switching 120V
ac inductive loads are a Harris MOV, part number V220 MA2A, or
an Allen-Bradley MOV, Catalog Number 599-K04 or 599-KA04,
Series C or later.
Consult the varistor manufacturers data sheet when selecting a
varistor for your application.

ATTENTION: Do not use suppressors having RC


networks, since damage to triacs could occur.
Allen-Bradley ac surge suppressors not recommended
for use with triacs include Catalog Numbers
199-FSMA1, 199-FSMA2, 1401-N10, and 700-N24.

Applications such as high frequency welding equipment and large ac


motors generate excessively high levels of electrical noise. In these
applications, all possible sources of noise should be suppressed.
Achieve best results when the noise suppressors are connected as
closely as possible to the surge generating device. (See table below.)
Device

Coil Voltage

Suppressor Catalog
Number

Bulletin 509 Motor Starter


Bulletin 509 Motor Starter

120V ac
240V ac

599K04
599KA04

Bulletin 100 Contactor


Bulletin 100 Contactor

120V ac
240V ac

199FSMA1
199F5MA2

Bulletin 709 Motor Starter

120V ac

1401N10

Bulletin 700 Type R, RM Relays

ac coil

None Required

Bulletin 700 Type R Relay


Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay

12V dc
12V dc

700N22
700N28

Bulletin 700 Type R Relay


Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay

24V dc
24V dc

700N10
700N13

Bulletin 700 Type R Relay


Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay

48V dc
48V dc

700N16
700N17

Bulletin 700 Type R Relay


Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay

115-125V dc
115-125V dc

700N11
700N14

Bulletin 700 Type R Relay


Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay

230-250V dc
230-250V dc

700N12
700N15

Bulletin 700 Type N, P, or PK Relay

150V max, ac or dc

700N24

Miscellaneous electromagnetic
devices limited to 35 sealed VA

150V max, ac or dc

700N24

Series C or later of these catalog numbers do not contain capacitors. They are recommended for
use with SLC 500 triac outputs.

Not recommended for use with triac outputs.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

B18

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Class I, Division 2 Applications (United States Only)


Important:

When installing peripheral devices (for example, push


buttons, lamps) into a hazardous environment, ensure
that they are Class I, Division 2 certified, or determined
to be safe for the environment.

Output Contact Protection


Inductive load devices such as motor starters and solenoids may
require the use of some type of surge suppression to protect the
controller output contacts. Switching inductive loads without Surge
Suppression can significantly reduce lifetime or relay contacts. The
figure below details the use of surge suppression devices.
Surge Suppression for Inductive ac Load Devices

Output Device

Output Device

Output Device
Surge
Suppressor

RC Network

Varistor

Surge Suppression for Inductive dc Load Devices


+


Output Device

Diode (A surge suppressor can also be used.)

Contact protection methods for inductive ac and dc output devices.

These surge suppression circuits connect directly across the load


device. This reduces arcing of the output contacts. (High transient
can cause arcing that occurs when switching off an inductive device.)
Suitable surge suppression methods for inductive ac load devices
include a varistor, an RC network, or an Allen-Bradley surge
suppressor. These components must be appropriately rated to
suppress the switching transient characteristic of the particular
inductive device.
For inductive dc load devices, a diode is suitable. A 1N4004 diode
is acceptable for most applications.
We recommend that you locate the suppression device as close as
possible to the load device.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Mounting Your Control


System

B19

This section assists you in mounting your modular style unit. It


consists of the dimensions of the four modular hardware styles and
link coupler. For more information, see the SLC 500 Modular
Chassis Installation Instructions, Publication Number 1746-5.8.

Mounting Modular Hardware Style Units


You can mount the modular hardware style units directly to the back
panel of your enclosure using the mounting tabs and M4 or M5 (#10
or #12) screws. The torque requirement is 3.4 N-m (30 in-lbs)
maximum.
Left-side View (all chassis)
0.1 cm
(0.04 in.)

17.1 cm
(6.73 in.)

14.0 cm
(5.51 in.)

14.5 cm
(5.71 in.)

1746-A4
1.1 cm Dia.
(0.433 in.)

7.0 cm
(2.76 in.)

0.55 cm Dia.
(0.217 in.)


14.0 cm
(5.51 in.)

15.8 cm
(6.22 in.)

17.1 cm
(6.73 in.)

4.5 cm
(1.77 in.)
21.5 cm
(8.46 in.)
23.5 cm
(9.25 in.)

0.55 cm Dia.
(0.217 in.)

1.4 cm
(0.55 in.)

26.1 cm
(10.28 in.)

Dimensions with 1746P1 power supply.


Dimensions with 1746P2 or 1746P3 power supply.
Dimensions with 1746P4 power supply.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

B20

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

1746-A7
1.1 cm Dia.
(0.433 in.)

0.55 cm Dia.
(0.217 in.)

17.5 cm
(6.89 in.)


17.1 cm
(6.73 in.)

15.8 cm
(6.22 in.)

14.0 cm
(5.51 in.)

.55 cm Dia.
(0.217 in.)

32.0 cm
(12.60 in.)

4.5 cm
(1.77 in.)
1.4 cm
(0.55 in.)

34.0 cm
(13.39 in.)
36.6 cm
(14.41 in.)

1746-A10
1.1 cm Dia.
(0.433 in.)

0.55 cm Dia.
(0.217 in.)

14.0 cm
(5.51 in.)

5.5 cm
(2.17 in.)

14.0 cm
(5.51 in.)

15.8 cm
(6.22 in.)

17.1 cm
(6.73 in.)

0.55 cm Dia.
(0.217 in.)

14.0 cm
(5.51 in.)

48.1 cm
(18.94 in.)

45.5 cm
(17.91 in.)

43.5 cm
(17.13 in.)

Dimensions with 1746P1 power supply.


Dimensions with 1746P2 or 1746P3 power supply.
Dimensions with 1746P4 power supply.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

1.4 cm
(0.55 in.)

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

B21

1746-A13
1.1 cm Dia.
(0.433 in.)

0.55 cm Dia.
(0.217 in.)

14.0 cm
(5.51 in.)

10.5 cm
(4.13 in.)

5.5 cm
(2.17 in.)


17.1 cm
(6.73 in.)
15.8 cm
(6.22 in.)

14.0 cm
(5.51 in.)

14.0 cm
(5.51 in.)

0.55 cm Dia.
(0.217 in.)

58.6 cm
(23.07 in.)

56.0 cm
(22.05 in.)

54.0 cm
(21.26 in.)

1.4 cm
(0.55 in.)

Dimensions with 1746P1 power supply.


Dimensions with 1746P2 or 1746P3 power supply.
Dimensions with 1746P4 power supply.

Link Coupler (AIC)


R 2.74
(0.11)

146
(5.75)

R 5.5
(0.22)

172
(6.75)
159
(6.24)

137
(5.41)

14
(0.55)
7.1
(0.28)

38
(1.50)

Front View

5.5 Dia.
(0.216)

4.3
(0.17)

millimeters
(inches)

Right Side View

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

B22

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Installing Your I/O Modules

This section describes the features of an I/O module, defines sinking


and sourcing, and provides installation instructions for an I/O
module.

Features of an SLC 500 I/O Module


Below is an example of a combination I/O module.
OUTPUT

Color Band

0 4
1 5
2
3

INPUT
0 4
1 5
2
3

I/O Status Indicators

Terminal Block Screw

HSCE

Input and Output Terminals


Connected to Terminal Block

VACVDC
OUT 0
OUT 1
OUT 2
OUT 3

Terminal Block (May be


colorcoded and removable
on some modules.)

OUT 4
OUT 5
NOT
USED
NOT
USED
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
IN 4
IN 5
NOT
USED

Terminal Block Screw

NOT
USED
AC COM

Wire Tie Slots

Wires Leading to Output


and Input Devices

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Hinged Terminal Door


with Wiring Label

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

B23

Definition of Sinking and Sourcing


Sinking and sourcing are terms used to describe a current signal flow
relationship between field input and output devices in a control
system and their power supply.
Field devices connected to the positive side (+V) of the field
power supply are sourcing field devices.
Field devices connected to the negative side (dc Common) of the
field power supply are called sinking field devices.
To maintain electrical compatibility between field devices and the
programmable controller system, this definition is extended to the
input/output circuits on the discrete I/O modules.
Sourcing I/O circuits supply (source) current to sinking field
devices.
Sinking I/O circuits receive (sink) current from sourcing field
devices.
Europe: The dc sinking input and sourcing output module circuits
are the commonly used options.
Contact Output Circuits ac or dc
Relays can be used for either ac or dc output circuits and
accommodate either sinking or sourcing field devices. These
capabilities are a result of the output switch being a mechanical
contact closure, not sensitive to current flow direction and capable of
accommodating a broad range of voltages.
This high degree of application flexibility makes contact output
modules very popular and useful in control environments with a
broad mix of electrical I/O circuit requirements.
Solid State dc I/O Circuits
The design of dc field devices typically requires that they be used in
a specific sinking or sourcing circuit depending on the internal
circuitry of the device. The dc input and output field circuits are
commonly used with field devices that have some form of internal
solid state circuitry that need a dc signal voltage to function.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

B24

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Sourcing Device with Sinking Input Module Circuit


The field device is on the positive side of the power supply between
the supply and the input terminal. When the field device is activated,
it sources current to the input circuit.
FIELD DEVICE

I
Input

DC
INPUT
CIRCUIT

DC POWER
SUPPLY
_
DC Com

Sinking Device with Sourcing Input Module Circuit


The field device is on the negative side of the power supply between
the supply and the input terminal. When the field device is activated,
it sinks current from the input circuit.
I
Input

FIELD DEVICE
_

DC
INPUT
CIRCUIT

DC POWER
SUPPLY
+
VDC

Sinking Device with Sourcing Output Module Circuit


The field device is on the negative side of the power supply between
the supply and the output terminal. When the output is activated, it
sources current to the field device.

+
DC POWER
SUPPLY
_

FIELD DEVICE

VDC
I
Out

DC Com

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

DC
OUTPUT
CIRCUIT

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

B25

Sourcing Device with Sinking Output Module Circuit


The field device is on the positive side of the power supply between
the supply and the output terminal. When the output is activated, it
sinks current from the field device.
VDC
+
DC POWER
SUPPLY
_

I
FIELD DEVICE

Out
DC
OUTPUT
CIRCUIT
DC Com

Inserting I/O Modules


The procedure for installing I/O modules is similar to the procedure
for installing the 1747-ASB module. Follow the steps below.

ATTENTION: Disconnect power before attempting


to install, remove, or wire modules.

1. Disconnect power.
2. Align circuit board of the module with the chassis card guide.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

B26

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

3. Slide the module into the chassis until the top and bottom tabs
lock into place.
4. Insert the wire tie in the slots.
5. Route the wires down and away from the module, securing them
with the wire tie.
OUTPUT INPUT
0 4
1 5
2
3

0 4
1 5
2
3

Wire Tie

Wires Leading to Output


and Input Devices

6. Cover all unused slots with the Card Slot Filler, Catalog Number
1746-N2, to keep the chassis free from dust and debris.

Removing I/O Modules

ATTENTION: Disconnect power before attempting


to install, remove, or wire modules.

1. Disconnect power.
2. Press and hold the module release located on each self-locking
tab and slide the module out of the chassis slot.
3. Cover all unused slots with the Card Slot Filler, Catalog Number
1746-N2, to keep the chassis free from dust and debris.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Wiring the I/O Modules

B27

The following are general recommendations for wiring I/O devices.

ATTENTION: Before you install and wire I/O


devices, disconnect power from the controller and any
other source to the I/O devices.

Use acceptable wire gauge The I/O wiring terminals are


designed to accept two wires per terminal (maximum) of the
following size wire:
Europe: 2mm2 cross section or smaller
United States: 14 AWG or smaller stranded wires
Label wires Label wiring to I/O devices, power sources, and
ground. Use tape, shrink-tubing, or other dependable means for
labeling purposes. In addition to labeling, use colored insulation to
identify wiring based on signal characteristics. For example, you
may use blue for dc I/O wiring and red for ac I/O wiring.
Secure wires Route the wires down and away from the module,
securing them with the cable tie.
Bundle wires Bundle wiring for each similar I/O device together.
If you use ducts, allow at least 5 cm (2 in.) between the ducts and the
controller so there is sufficient room to wire the devices.
Identify terminals Terminal cover plates have a write-on area for
each terminal. Use this area to identify your I/O devices. Label the
removable terminal block if you have not already.

ATTENTION: Calculate the maximum possible


current in each power and common wire. Observe all
local electrical codes dictating the maximum current
allowable for each wire size. Current above the
maximum ratings may cause wiring to overheat, which
can cause damage.
Capacitors on input modules have a stored charge that
can cause a non-lethal shock. Avoid mounting the
controller in a position where installation or service
personnel would be in danger from startle reaction.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

B28

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Using Removable Terminal Blocks


The Removable Terminal Block (RTB) is provided on all 12-point
and 16-point discrete I/O modules and analog modules. They allow
for faster and more convenient wiring of the I/O modules. The RTBs
and modules are color-coded as follows:
If the color is:

Then the RTB is for:

red

ac inputs/outputs

blue

dc inputs/outputs

orange

relay outputs

green

specialty modules

black

These I/O wiring terminal blocks are not removable.

Replacement terminal blocks are available if they are lost or


damaged.
Removing the RTB
Below are guidelines for removing the RTB.

ATTENTION: Disconnect power before attempting


to install or remove I/O modules or their terminal
blocks.

1. If the I/O module is already installed in the chassis, disconnect


power.
2. Unscrew the upper right and lower left terminal block release
screws.
3. Grasp the RTB with your thumb and forefinger and pull straight
out.
4. Write the appropriate slot, chassis, and module type on the RTB
label.
Terminal Block
Release Screw

Terminal Block
Release Screw
SLOT______RACK______

Dot indicates terminal


number 0 (or top of I/O wiring).

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

MODULE______

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

B29

Installing the RTB


Below are guidelines for installing the RTB.
1. Be sure the color of the RTB matches the color band on the
module.

ATTENTION: Inserting a wired RTB on an incorrect


module can damage the module circuitry when power
is applied.

2. Write the appropriate slot, chassis, and module type on the RTB
label.

ATTENTION: Disconnect power before attempting


to install or remove I/O modules or their terminal
blocks.

3. Disconnect power.
4. Align the terminal block release screws with the mating
connector in the module.
5. Press the RTB firmly onto the connector contacts.
6. Tighten the terminal block release screws. To avoid cracking the
terminal block, alternate the tightening of the screws.

Terminal Block Release Screws


Maximum Torque=0.7-0.9
NewtonMeters (6-8 in./lbs.)

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

B30

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Calculating Heat
Dissipation for Your
Control System

The following terms are used throughout this section. Familiarize


yourself with them before proceeding further into the section.
Watts per point maximum heat dissipation that can occur in each
field wiring point when energized.
Minimum watts amount of heat dissipation that can occur when
there is no field power present.
Maximum watts maximum amount of heat that the module
generates with field power present.

Module Heat Dissipation: Calculated Watts vs. Maximum Watts


There are two ways that you can calculate heat dissipation.
Calculated Watts if you want to determine the amount of heat
generated by the points energized on your module, use the formula
below for calculating the heat dissipation of each module. Then use
these values for calculating the power supply loading for each
chassis this is done using the worksheet.
(number of points energized x watts per point) + minimum watts =
heat dissipation of module
Maximum watts maximum amount of heat that the module
generates with field power present. Use maximum watts especially
if you are not sure how many points on a module will be energized at
any time.
Once you have determined which way you will calculate the heat
dissipation of your modules, see the Example Worksheet for
Calculating Heat Dissipation on page B35. This worksheet shows
you how to calculate the heat dissipation for the example 1747-ASB
system on page B34. Once you feel comfortable with the layout of
the worksheet, go to the worksheet on page B36 and fill it out for
your control system.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

B31

Calculating the Power Supply Loading


Use the table below to calculate the power supply loading for each
chassis that you have (step 1 of the worksheet).
Hardware
Component

Input
Modules

Output
O
tp t
Modules

Catalog
Numbers

Watts per Point

1746IA4
1746IA8
1746IA16
1746IB8
1746IB16
1746IB32
1746IC16
1746IG16
1746IH16
1746IM4
1746IM8
1746IM16
1746IN16
1746ITB16
1746ITV16
1746IV8
1746IV16
1746IV32
1746OA8
1746OA16
1746OAP12
1746OB8
1746OB16
1746OB32
1746OBP8
1746OBP16
1746OG16
1746OV8
1746OV16
1746OV32
1746OVP16
1746OW4
1746OW8
1746OW16

0.270
0.270
0.270
0.200
0.200
0.200
0.220
0.020

1746OX8

0.825

0.350
0.350
0.350
0.350
0.200
0.200
0.200
0.200
0.200
1.000
0.462
1.000
0.775
0.338
0.078
0.300
0.310
0.033
0.775
0.388
0.078
0.310
0.133
0.138
0.033

Minimum
Watts
0.175
0.250
0.425
0.250
0.425
0.530
0.425
0.700
consult factory
0.175
0.250
0.425
0.425
0.425
0.425
0.250
0.425
0.530
0.925
1.850
1.850
0.675
1.400
2.260
0.675
1.250
0.900
0.675
1.400
2.260
1.250
1.310
2.590
5.170
2.590

Maximum
Watts
1.300
2.400
4.800
1.900
3.600
6.900
3.950
1.000
1.600
3.100
6.000
6.000
3.600
3.600
1.900
3.600
6.900
9.000
9.300
10.850
6.900
7.600
4.800
3.080
6.260
1.500
6.900
7.600
4.800
6.260
1.900
3.700
5.700
8.600

Continued on the next page.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

B32

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Hardware
Component

Catalog
Numbers

1746BAS
1746FIO4I
1746FIO4V
1746HS
1746HSTP1
1746NI4
1746NIO4I
1746NIO4V
1746NO4I
1746NO4V
1746NR4
1746NT4
1747KE

0.270 per input pt.


0.133 per output pt.
0.270 per input pt.
0.133 per output pt.
0.270 per input pt.
0.133 per output pt.
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA

1747ASB

NA

1746IO4
Input &
Output
Modules

1746IO8
1746IO12

Specialty
Specialt
Modules

Adapter
Modules

NA (Not Applicable)

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Watts per Point

Minimum
Watts

Maximum
Watts

0.750

1.600

1.380

3.000

2.130

4.600

3.750
3.760
3.040

3.750

3.800
3.800
3.100
consult factory
consult factory
2.200
3.800
3.100
5.000
3.800
consult factory
consult factory
3.800

1.875

1.875

2.170
3.760
3.040
4.960
3.780

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

B33

Determining the Power Supply Dissipation


Use the graphs below for determining the power supply dissipation
in step 2 of the worksheet.
1746P2 Power Supply Change in Power Dissipation
due to Output Loading

18

20

Power Supply Dissipation (Watts)

Power Supply Dissipation (Watts)

1746P1 Power Supply Change in Power Dissipation due to


Output Loading

16
14
12
10
8
6
4

18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4

0
0

10

15

20

25

Power Supply Loading (Watts)

30

40

50

60

1746P4 Power Supply Change in Power


Dissipation due to Output Loading
25

Power Supply Dissipation (Watts)

25

Power Supply Dissipation (Watts)

20

Power Supply Loading (Watts)

1746P3 Power Supply Change in Power


Dissipation due to Output Loading

20
15
10
5
0

10

20
15
10
5
0

10

15

20

25

30

35

Power Supply Loading (Watts)

40

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

Power Supply Loading (Watts)

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

B34

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Example Heat Dissipation Calculation


If your controller consisted of the following hardware components,
you would calculate heat dissipation as shown in the worksheet on
page B35.
DTAM

Chassis 1

Chassis 2

Peripheral Device

Slot 0

Slot 4

User Power
To Peripheral

The following table details the total watts dissipated by the modules
and peripheral devices in the above SLC 500 controller.
Chassis 1

Chassis 2

Slot Number

Catalog Number

Min. Watts

Max. Watts

Slot Number

Catalog Number

Min. Watts

Max. Watts

1747L511

1.75

1.75

1746IA16

.425

4.8

1746BAS

3.75

3.8

1746IA16

.425

4.8

1746IA8

.250

2.4

1746OW16

5.17

5.5

1746OV8

.675

6.9

1746OW16

5.17

5.7

Peripheral
Device

1747DTAM

2.5

2.5

NA

NA

NA

NA

User Power to
Peripheral

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

2.4

NA

This output card uses 5.5 watts because only 10 points are on at any one time. Using the
calculated watts formula (number of points energized x watts per point) + minimum watts =
heat dissipation of module the calculated watts for the 1746OW16 module is 5.5W: (10 points
X .033) + 5.17 = 5.5W.
The user power on the 1746P1 power supply for Chassis 2 is being used to power a peripheral
(100 mA at 24V dc).
NA (Not Applicable)

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

B35

Example - Worksheet for Calculating Heat Dissipation


Procedure:

Chassis 1

Chassis 2

Chassis 3

17.350
__________

20.800
_________

_________

13.000
_________

15.000
_________

_________

30.350 +
________

35.800 +
________

________ =

Heat
Dissipation

1. Calculate the heat dissipation for each chassis without the power supply.
A.

Write in the watts (calculated watts or maximum watts, see page B-30) dissipated
by the adapter, I/O and specialty modules, and any peripheral devices attached to the
adapter. Then, for each chassis, add these values together.
Chassis 1
Cat. No.
Ht. Dis.

Chassis 2
Cat. No.
Ht. Dis.

Chassis 3
Cat. No.
Ht. Dis.

_________|_________
L511
1.750
_________|_________
BAS
3.800
_________|_________
IA8
2.400
_________|_________
OV8
6.900
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
peripheral device _________|_________
peripheral device _________|_________

_________|_________
IA16
4.800
_________|_________
IA16
4.800
_________|_________
OW16
5.500
_________|_________
OW16
5.700
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________

_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________

17.350
_______

20.800
_______

_______

Total:
B.

Place the heat dissipation for each chassis into the appropriate columns.

2. Calculate the heat dissipation for each power supply.


A.

Calculate the power supply loading for each chassis: write in the minimum watts for
each device (see page B-31) and then, for each chassis, add these values together.
Important: If you have a device connected to user power, multiply 24V by the current
used. Include user power in the total power supply loading.
Chassis 1
Cat. No.
Min. Ht. Dis.

Chassis 2
Cat. No.
Min. Ht. Dis.

Chassis 3
Cat. No.
Min. Ht. Dis.

_________|_________
L511
1.750
_________|_________
BAS
3.750
_________|_________
IA8
0.250
_________|_________
OV8
0.675
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
user power
_________|_________
peripheral device _________|_________
DTAM
2.500
peripheral device _________|_________

_________|_________
IA16
0.425
_________|_________
IA16
0.425
_________|_________
OW16
5.170
_________|_________
OW16
5.170
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
2.400
_________|_________
_________|_________

_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________

8.925
_______

13.590
_______

_______

Total:
B.

Use the power supply loading for each chassis and the graphs on page B-33 to
determine the ppower supply
pp y dissipation.
p
Place the ppower supply
pp y dissipations
p
into the
appropriate columns.
columns

3. Add the chassis dissipation to the power supply dissipation.


4. Add across the columns for the total heat dissipation of the adapter.

66.150 W
_______

United States: To convert to BTUs/hr., multiply the total heat dissipation by 3.414.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

B36

Understanding Your SLC 500/1746 Control System

Worksheet for Calculating Heat Dissipation


Make copies of this worksheet as needed.
Procedure:

Chassis 1

Chassis 2

Chassis 3

__________

_________

_________

_________

_________

_________

________ +

________ +

________ =

Heat
Dissipation

1. Calculate the heat dissipation for each chassis without the power supply.
A.

Write in the watts (calculated watts or maximum watts, see page B-30) dissipated
by the adapter, I/O and specialty modules, and any peripheral devices attached to the
adapter. Then, for each chassis, add these values together.
Chassis 1
Cat. No.
Ht. Dis.

_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
peripheral device _________|_________
peripheral device _________|_________
Total:
B.

Chassis 2
Cat. No.
Ht. Dis.

Chassis 3
Cat. No.
Ht. Dis.

_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________

_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________

_______

_______

_______

Place the heat dissipation for each chassis into the appropriate columns.

2. Calculate the heat dissipation for each power supply.


A.

Calculate the power supply loading for each chassis: write in the minimum watts for
each device (see page B-31) and then, for each chassis, add these values together.
Important: If you have a device connected to user power, multiply 24V by the current
used. Include user power in the total power supply loading.
Chassis 1
Cat. No.
Min. Ht. Dis.

_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
user power
_________|_________
peripheral device _________|_________
peripheral device _________|_________
Total:
B.

Chassis 2
Cat. No.
Min. Ht. Dis.

Chassis 3
Cat. No.
Min. Ht. Dis.

_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________

_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________
_________|_________

_______

_______

_______

Use the power supply loading for each chassis and the graphs on page B-33 to
determine the ppower supply
pp y dissipation.
p
Place the ppower supply
pp y dissipations
p
into the
appropriate columns.
columns

3. Add the chassis dissipation to the power supply dissipation.


4. Add across the columns for the total heat dissipation of the adapter.

_______ W

United States: To convert to BTUs/hr., multiply the total heat dissipation by 3.414.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Appendix

Differences Between the


1747ASB Module and the
1771ASB Series C Module
This appendix examines the differences between Catalog Number
1747-ASB and Catalog Number 1771-ASB Series C, Revision E or
later. These differences are:
image size selection
hold last state operation
specialty I/O module mapping and control
remote expansion chassis
starting logical group number selection
inserting and removing I/O modules under power
DIP switch locations
I/O module keying
physical slot numbering
status indication
throughput performance
inhibit functionality
Page and chapter references are provided within each heading so you
can quickly review the information specific to Catalog Number
1747-ASB.

Image Size Selection


(page 4-9)

The 1771-ASB image size is automatically selected based on the


chassis size and addressing mode. The automatic assignment is
possible because the number of 1771 chassis physical slots are
provided in 2-group multiples. Therefore, there are no unused
physical I/O slots or scanner image that is not utilized.
The 1747-ASB image size must be selected with DIP switches
(SW2-5,6,7,8). The selection is necessary because the 1746 chassis
are not provided in 2-group multiples. In some cases, you must
make a choice between not using a slot or not using scanner image.
For more information on odd size chassis and image conditions, refer
to page 413.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

C2

Differences Between the 1747-ASB Module and the 1771-ASB Series C Module

Hold Last State Operation


(page 4-15)

When the hold last state mode is selected, the 1771-ASB module
holds discrete outputs in their last state if:
an error occurs
RIO communications are lost
the 1771-ASB module is inhibited
the 1771-ASB module receives reset, adapter decide commands
from the scanner
When the hold last state mode is selected the 1747-ASB module
holds discrete outputs in their last state if:
RIO communications are lost
the 1747-ASB module is inhibited
the 1771-ASB module receives reset, adapter decide commands
from the scanner
The 1747-ASB module always clears discrete outputs if:
an I/O module fault occurs
a 1747-ASB error occurs
a remote expansion chassis loses power

ATTENTION: When the discrete outputs are being


held in their last state by the 1747-ASB module, the
following information concerning the specialty
modules must be considered:
The specialty I/O modules operate as if they are being
controlled by an SLC processor in the run mode. Refer
to the specialty I/O modules user manual to determine
the response to this condition.
The specialty I/O modules inputs are read by the ASB
module. However, the specialty I/O modules outputs
are not modified by the ASB module.

Remote Expansion Chassis


(page 3-1)

The 1771-ASB module does not support expansion chassis. It allows


up to 16 physical slots in one 1771 chassis.
The 1747-ASB module can control up to three chassis; a remote
chassis and two remote expansion chassis. If power to any remote
expansion chassis is lost, a 1747-ASB error occurs and all discrete
outputs are cleared, regardless of the hold last state switch setting.
When power to the remote expansion chassis is restored, the ASB
module automatically resumes operation as if the ASB modules
power was cycled.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Differences Between the 1747-ASB Module and the 1771-ASB Series C Module

Inserting and Removing I/O


Modules Under Power
(page 6-9)

C3

ATTENTION: Disconnect power to the 1771- or


1747-ASB chassis before attempting to insert, remove,
or wire any I/O modules.

In most cases, inserting or removing I/O modules while under power


does not cause a 1771-ASB error.
Whenever the 1747-ASB module is not faulted, inserting or
removing I/O modules under power does cause a 1747-ASB error.

Starting Logical Group


Number Selection
(page 4-4)

In the RIO link system, only even numbered logical group numbers
(0, 2, 4, or 6) are valid.
The 1771-ASB module limits the allowable starting logical group
numbers based on the selected addressing mode and chassis size.
The 1747-ASB module allows virtually any group number to be
selected. The exception is when 1/2-slot addressing and discrete
mode is selected. Then, only logical groups 0 and 4 can be used.

Specialty I/O Module Image


Mapping and Control
(page 3-13)

The 1771-ASB module maps all discrete I/O modules using discrete
transfers; data is exchanged with the scanner using RIO discrete
transfers on the RIO link. All specialty (Intelligent) I/O modules
are block transfer mapped, data is exchanged with the scanner using
RIO block transfers.
An Intelligent I/O module is a 1771 nondiscrete I/O module.

The 1747-ASB module handles discrete modules the same way the
1771-ASB module does by using RIO discrete transfers.
Important:

If you are only using discrete modules, the 1771-ASB


and 1747-ASB modules mapping and control are
identical.

If the 1747-ASB module is configured for the block transfer mode, it


handles all specialty I/O modules in the same manner as the
1771-ASB module does by using RIO block transfers.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

C4

Differences Between the 1747-ASB Module and the 1771-ASB Series C Module

Important:

PLC processor control of 1771 and 1747 specialty I/O


modules on the RIO link is the same if the 1747-ASB
module is configured for RIO block transfer. However,
the I/O modules themselves are not controlled in the
same way.
For example, if a 1771-IFE analog input module is used
with the 1771-ASB module, RIO block transfers are
used to transfer the 1771-IFE image data between the
scanner and 1771-ASB module. In addition, the
1771-IFE module also receives configuration
information from the scanner using RIO block transfers.
If a 1746-NI4 analog input module is used with the
1747-ASB module, a RIO block transfer is used to
transfer 1747-NI4 image data between the scanner and
the 1747-ASB module. However the 1746-NI4 module
requires no configuration information from the scanner.
In addition , the 1771-IFE image layout is not the same
as the 1746-NI4 image layout. For example, the
1771-IFE image contains some alarm values and has
words for the modules eight inputs. The 1746-NI4
image only has words for the modules four inputs.

If the 1747-ASB module is configured for the discrete mode, it


attempts to map all specialty I/O modules discretely. For more
information on how discrete I/O modules are mapped, refer to
page 313.

DIP Switch Locations


(chapter 4)

The 1771-ASB module has two DIP switches and uses one DIP
switch on the 1771 chassis.
The 1747-ASB module has three DIP switches.

I/O Module Keying


(page 4-21)

The 1771-ASB module uses the chassis hardware keying bands to


ensure the proper I/O modules are installed in the correct slot.
The 1747-ASB module uses a DIP switch setting and software to
ensure that the proper I/O modules are installed in the correct slots.

Physical Slot Numbering


(page 3-2)

The 1771-ASB module resides in an unnumbered slot. The first


physical slot available to an I/O module is slot 0. The subsequent
physical slots are numbered decimally, up to a maximum of 15.
The 1747-ASB module resides in slot 0. The first physical slot
available to an I/O module is slot 1. The subsequent physical slots
are numbered decimally, up to a maximum of 30.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Differences Between the 1747-ASB Module and the 1771-ASB Series C Module

Status Indication
(page 7-1)

C5

The 1771-ASB module has three LEDs that indicate module and
system status.
The 1747-ASB module has two LEDs and three 7-segment status
display that indicate module and system status. The 7-segment
status displays provide more detailed operating status and error
indication than what can be provided with LEDs.

Throughput
(page A-2)
Inhibit Functionality
(page 6-3)

In most cases the 1747-ASB throughput times are slower than the
1771-ASB throughput times. Refer to appendix A for the 1747-ASB
throughput time information.

If some, but not all, of the 1771-ASB Series C, Revision E logical


devices are inhibited, the 1771-ASB module continues to:
communicate on the RIO link
control outputs in its chassis
If some, but not all, of the 1747-ASB logical devices are inhibited,
the 1747-ASB module:
continues to communicate on the RIO link if processor restart
lockout is not selected, or stops communicating on the RIO link if
processor restart lockout is selected
stops controlling outputs in its chassis regardless of the processor
restart lockout selection. Outputs are held in last state if hold last
state is selected or they are reset if hold last state is not selected.

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Appendix

DIP Switch and Address


Configuration Worksheets
This appendix provides worksheets for you to configure your DIP
switches and to address your I/O modules.

DIP Switch Configuration

Use this worksheet to record the DIP switch settings for each of your
module.
Self Locking Tab

DIP Switches

O
N

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FRN
MADE IN USA

I/O Module Keying

FOR HAZ. LOC. A196

FAC 1M

Specialty I/O Mode

OPERATING
TEMPERATURE
CODE T3C

Addressing Mode Bit 0 (LSB)

SA

CLASS 1, GROUPS A, B, C AND D, DIV. 2

Addressing Mode Bit 1 (MSB)

Baud Rate Bit 1 (MSB)


Baud Rate Bit 0 (LSB)
Primary/Complementary SLC Chassis
Reserved
ASB Module Image Size Bit 3 (MSB)
ASB Module Image Size Bit 2
ASB Module Image Size Bit 1
ASB Module Image Size Bit 0 (LSB)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup

O
N

Link Response

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Processor Restart Lockout

SW1

O
N

O
N

Hold Last State

UL

SW2

IMPORTANT:
SLC 500
INSTALL IN SLOT ZERO OF MODULAR CHASSIS ONLY
REMOTE I/O ADAPTER MODULE
CURRENT REQUIREMENT: 375mA
SER
LISTED IND. CONT. EQ.

O
N

SW3

CAT

O
N

SERIAL NO.

SW1

SW2

SW3

1747ASB Module

Logical Rack Number Bit 5 (MSB)


Logical Rack Number Bit 4
Logical Rack Number Bit 3
Logical Rack Number Bit 2
Logical Rack Number Bit 1
Logical Rack Number Bit 0 (LSB)
Logical Group Number Bit 1 (MSB)
Logical Group Number Bit 0 (LSB)

ON
OFF

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

D2

DIP Switch and Address Configuration Worksheets

SW3

SW2

Link Response
Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup
Addressing Mode Bit 1 (MSB)
Addressing Mode Bit 0 (LSB)
Specialty I/O Mode
I/O Module Keying

Primary/Complementary SLC Chassis


Reserved
ASB Module Image Size Bit 3 (MSB)
ASB Module Image Size Bit 2
ASB Module Image Size Bit 1
ASB Module Image Size Bit 0 (LSB)

Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup


Addressing Mode Bit 1 (MSB)
Addressing Mode Bit 0 (LSB)
Specialty I/O Mode
I/O Module Keying

Baud Rate Bit 1 (MSB)


Baud Rate Bit 0 (LSB)
Primary/Complementary SLC Chassis
Reserved
ASB Module Image Size Bit 3 (MSB)
ASB Module Image Size Bit 2
ASB Module Image Size Bit 1
ASB Module Image Size Bit 0 (LSB)

SW2

Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup


Addressing Mode Bit 1 (MSB)
Addressing Mode Bit 0 (LSB)
Specialty I/O Mode
I/O Module Keying

Baud Rate Bit 1 (MSB)


Baud Rate Bit 0 (LSB)
Primary/Complementary SLC Chassis
Reserved
ASB Module Image Size Bit 3 (MSB)
ASB Module Image Size Bit 2
ASB Module Image Size Bit 1
ASB Module Image Size Bit 0 (LSB)

SW2

Addressing Mode Bit 1 (MSB)


Addressing Mode Bit 0 (LSB)
Specialty I/O Mode
I/O Module Keying

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Baud Rate Bit 1 (MSB)


Baud Rate Bit 0 (LSB)
Primary/Complementary SLC Chassis
Reserved
ASB Module Image Size Bit 3 (MSB)
ASB Module Image Size Bit 2
ASB Module Image Size Bit 1
ASB Module Image Size Bit 0 (LSB)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Last Chassis/PLC3 Backup

Logical Group Number Bit 1 (MSB)


Logical Group Number Bit 0 (LSB)

Logical Rack Number Bit 5 (MSB)


Logical Rack Number Bit 4
Logical Rack Number Bit 3
Logical Rack Number Bit 2
Logical Rack Number Bit 1
Logical Rack Number Bit 0 (LSB)
Logical Group Number Bit 1 (MSB)
Logical Group Number Bit 0 (LSB)

Logical Rack Number Bit 5 (MSB)


Logical Rack Number Bit 4
Logical Rack Number Bit 3
Logical Rack Number Bit 2
Logical Rack Number Bit 1
Logical Rack Number Bit 0 (LSB)
Logical Group Number Bit 1 (MSB)
Logical Group Number Bit 0 (LSB)

O
N

Link Response

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Processor Restart Lockout

Logical Rack Number Bit 0 (LSB)

SW1

O
N

O
N

Hold Last State

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Link Response

Logical Rack Number Bit 1

O
N

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Processor Restart Lockout

Logical Rack Number Bit 2

SW1

O
N

O
N

Hold Last State

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Link Response

Logical Rack Number Bit 3

O
N

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Processor Restart Lockout

Logical Rack Number Bit 5 (MSB)


Logical Rack Number Bit 4

SW1

O
N

O
N

Hold Last State

SW3

Module _

Baud Rate Bit 0 (LSB)

SW2

SW3

Module _

Baud Rate Bit 1 (MSB)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Processor Restart Lockout

SW3

Module _

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Hold Last State

O
N

O
N

O
N

Module _

SW1

Logical Rack Number Bit 5 (MSB)


Logical Rack Number Bit 4
Logical Rack Number Bit 3
Logical Rack Number Bit 2
Logical Rack Number Bit 1
Logical Rack Number Bit 0 (LSB)
Logical Group Number Bit 1 (MSB)
Logical Group Number Bit 0 (LSB)

DIP Switch and Address Configuration Worksheets

Address Configuration

Use this worksheet to address the I/O modules residing in the


1747-ASB module chassis.

SLC Processor Output Image

SLC Processor Input Image


High Byte
Bit Number Decimal 15

Logical
Rack 0

Logical
Rack 1

Logical
Rack 2

Logical
Rack 3

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

D3

High Byte

Low Byte
8 7

Bit Number Decimal 15


I:e.0
I:e.1
I:e.2
I:e.3
I:e.4
I:e.5
I:e.6
I:e.7
I:e.8
I:e.9
I:e.10
I:e.11
I:e.12
I:e.13
I:e.14
I:e.15
I:e.16
I:e.17
I:e.18
I:e.19
I:e.20
I:e.21
I:e.22
I:e.23
I:e.24
I:e.25
I:e.26
I:e.27
I:e.28
I:e.29
I:e.30
I:e.31

Logical
Rack 0

Logical
Rack 1

Logical
Rack 2

Logical
Rack 3

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

Low Byte
8 7

0
O:e.0
O:e.1
O:e.2
O:e.3
O:e.4
O:e.5
O:e.6
O:e.7
O:e.8
O:e.9
O:e.10
O:e.11
O:e.12
O:e.13
O:e.14
O:e.15
O:e.16
O:e.17
O:e.18
O:e.19
O:e.20
O:e.21
O:e.22
O:e.23
O:e.24
O:e.25
O:e.26
O:e.27
O:e.28
O:e.29
O:e.30
O:e.31

e = 1747SN Slot Number

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

D4

DIP Switch and Address Configuration Worksheets

SLC Processor Output Image

SLC Processor Input Image


High Byte
Bit Number Decimal 15

Logical
Rack 0

Logical
Rack 1

Logical
Rack 2

Logical
Rack 3

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

High Byte

Low Byte
8 7

Bit Number Decimal 15


I:e.0
I:e.1
I:e.2
I:e.3
I:e.4
I:e.5
I:e.6
I:e.7
I:e.8
I:e.9
I:e.10
I:e.11
I:e.12
I:e.13
I:e.14
I:e.15
I:e.16
I:e.17
I:e.18
I:e.19
I:e.20
I:e.21
I:e.22
I:e.23
I:e.24
I:e.25
I:e.26
I:e.27
I:e.28
I:e.29
I:e.30
I:e.31

Logical
Rack 0

Logical
Rack 1

Logical
Rack 2

Logical
Rack 3

e = 1747SN Slot Number

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 6
Group 7

Low Byte
8 7

O:e.0
O:e.1
O:e.2
O:e.3
O:e.4
O:e.5
O:e.6
O:e.7
O:e.8
O:e.9
O:e.10
O:e.11
O:e.12
O:e.13
O:e.14
O:e.15
O:e.16
O:e.17
O:e.18
O:e.19
O:e.20
O:e.21
O:e.22
O:e.23
O:e.24
O:e.25
O:e.26
O:e.27
O:e.28
O:e.29
O:e.30
O:e.31

Index

Numbers
1-slot addressing, 3-7
considerations, 3-8
examples, 3-10
1/2-slot addressing, 3-10
considerations, 3-11
examples, 3-12
1746-C7 cable, B-7
1746-C9 cable, B-7
1746-P1 power supply, B-2
1746-P2 power supply, B-2
1746-P3 power supply, B-2
1746-P4 power supply, B-2
1771-ASB series c, C-1
2-slot addressing, 3-4
considerations, 3-5
examples, 3-6
24V dc user power output current, B-2
24V dc user power output voltage, B-2

A
adapter, 1-4
extended node capability, 1-9
interaction with scanners, 1-2
on RIO link as slave device, 1-2
adapter image, 1-4
in relation to logical devices, 1-6
size of, 1-5
addressing I/O modules, 3-3
1-slot addressing, 3-7
considerations, 3-8
examples, 3-10
1/2-slot addressing, 3-10
considerations, 3-11
examples, 3-12
2-slot addressing, 3-4
considerations, 3-5
examples, 3-6
configuration worksheet, D-3
overview, 3-3
addressing labels, attaching to the I/O
modules, 2-5, 5-6
addressing mode, 4-20
in basic SLC example, 8-2, 8-5
in PLC example, 8-17, 8-18, 8-21,
8-22
in SLC example, 8-8, 8-12, 8-13

Allen-Bradley, P-6, 7-1


contacting for assistance, P-6, 7-1
ambient operating temperature rating, for
power supplies, B-2
application example program,
basic SLC, 8-6
PLC, 8-24
SLC, 8-15
application examples,
basic SLC, 8-1
PLC, 8-16
SLC, 8-7

8-6

8-1

ASB module backplane scan time,


throughput, A-6
ASB module features, 1-12
hardware, 1-13
cable tie slots, 1-15
DIP switches, 1-13
door label, 1-15
manufacturing test plug, 1-15
RIO link and processor restart lockout,
1-14
self-locking tabs, 1-15
status display and LEDs, 1-13
ASB module image size, 4-10
special image and chassis size
considerations, 4-13
ASB module installation,

5-1

ASB module overview, 1-1

B
base backplane scan time, throughput,
A-6
basic SLC application example, 8-1
application example program, 8-6
ASB module I/O mapping details, 8-5
module configuration details, 8-4
processor image, 8-3
RIO address label example, 8-5
RIO device configuration, 8-2
baud rate, 1-13
ASB module feature, 1-12
DIP switch setting, 4-4
error operating code, 7-3
link termination, 5-4
link wiring, 5-2
PLC example, 8-17
SLC basic example, 8-2
SLC example, 8-8

I2

Index

specifications, A-1
block transfer, 1-7
throughput, A-11
transferring data, 1-7
block transfer mode, 3-14

C
cable distances, 5-2
maximum, 5-2
cable tie slots, 1-15
calculating heat dissipation for the SLC 500
control system, B-30
calculated watts, B-30
maximum watts, B-30
power supply dissipation graphs, B-33
power supply loading table, B-31
chassis overview, 3-1, 4-13
odd sizes, 4-13
remote chassis, 3-2
remote expansion chassis, 3-2
types available, 3-1
chassis slot, card guides, 2-4, 5-2
check mode, 6-2
Class1, Division 2, 5-5
momentary switch, 5-5
common power source, B-13
input states on power down, B-14
loss of power source, B-14
other types of line conditions, B-14
compatible modules,

1-12

compatible RIO adapters,

1-11

compatible RIO scanners,

1-10

complementary I/O, 4-5


in basic SLC application example, 8-2,
8-4
in PLC application example, 8-17,
8-19, 8-20
in SLC application example, 8-8,
8-10, 8-11
contacting Allen-Bradley for assistance,
P-6, 7-1
contactors (bulletin 100), surge suppressors
for, B-17
contents of manual, P-2

D
definitions, P-3
differences between 1747-ASB and
1771-ASB series c modules, C-1
DIP switch locations, C-4

hold last state, C-2


I/O module keying, C-4
image size selection, C-1
inhibit functionality, C-5
inserting and removing I/O modules
under power, C-3
physical slot numbering, C-4
remote expansion chassis, C-2
specialty I/O module image mapping and
control, C-3
starting logical group number selection,
C-3
status indication, C-5
throughput, C-5
diode, 1N4004, B-18
DIP switch, 4-1
configuration of mismatch fault codes,
7-5
configuration worksheet, D-1
error operating codes for error conditions,
7-3
summary of switch settings, 4-22
SW 1, 4-2
configuration, 4-2
SW 2, 4-4
configuration, 4-4, 4-6
SW 3, 4-15
configuration, 4-15
DIP switch configuration mismatch fault
codes, 7-5
discrete I/O modules, 3-13
mapping, 3-13
overview of, 3-13
discrete I/O throughput with block transfers
present example, A-10
discrete I/O throughput without block
transfers present example, A-7
discrete mode, 3-15
discrete transfer, 1-2
transferring data, 1-7
door labels, 1-15
applying octal labels, 2-5, 5-7

E
equipment needed, 2-1
error operating codes for error conditions,
7-3
errors, 7-1
major, 7-1
minor, 7-1
examples, 8-1
basic SLC application, 8-1
PLC application, 8-16

Index

SLC application, 8-7

I/O module insertion under power, 6-9

extended node capability, 1-9


link termination, 5-4
of scanners and adapters, 1-9
of the ASB module, 1-9
specifications, A-1

fuse protection, power supply specification,


B-2

I/O module removal from a scanned slot,


6-9

I/O runtime fault codes,

2-2

H
hardware features, 1-13
cable tie slots, 1-15
DIP switches, 1-13
door label, 1-15
manufacturing test plug, 1-15
RIO link and processor restart lockout
connector, 1-14
self-locking tabs, 1-15
status displays and LEDs, 1-13
heat dissipation
example, B-34
worksheet, B-36

7-7

image mapping, 3-13


discrete, 3-13
specialty, 3-13
inhibit,

grounding guidelines, B-9

6-3

installing and wiring I/O modules, B-23


I/O module features, B-22
inserting I/O modules, B-25
removing I/O modules, B-26
sinking, B-23
sourcing, B-23
using removable terminal blocks, B-28
wiring I/O devices, B-27
installing the ASB module in an SLC
chassis, 5-1
internal current capacity, power supply
specification, B-2
invalid RIO link transfers,

6-5

hold last state, 4-15


in basic SLC example, 8-2, 8-4
in PLC example, 8-17, 8-19, 8-20
in SLC example, 8-8, 8-10, 8-11
start up and operation, 6-5
humidity rating, power supply specification,
B-2
humidity specifications, A-1

labels, addressing, attaching to the I/O


modules, 2-5, 5-6
labels, door, 1-15
applying octal labels, 2-5, 5-7
last chassis/PLC 3 backup, 4-19
in basic SLC example, 8-2, 8-4
in PLC example, 8-17, 8-19, 8-20
in SLC example, 8-8, 8-10, 8-11
line voltage, power supply specification,
B-2

I
I/O devices, recommendations for wiring
terminals, identify, B-27
wire gauge, use acceptable, B-27
wires, bundle, B-27
wires, label, B-27
wires, secure, B-27
I/O module addressing labels,
PLC as master, 5-6
SLC as master, 5-6

I/O module keying, 4-21


in basic SLC example, 8-2
in SLC example, 8-8

I/O module removal from an unscanned


slot, 6-10

getting started, procedures,

I3

5-6

I/O module configuration mismatch fault


codes, 7-6

link response time, 4-18


in basic SLC example, 8-2
in PLC example, 8-17, 8-19, 8-20
in SLC example, 8-8
link termination, 5-4
resistor required for, 5-4
link wiring, 5-2
correct link wiring, 5-2
incorrect link wiring, 5-2
link termination, 5-4
logical device, 1-6
adapters, 1-6

I4

Index

assigning space, D-3


logical group, 1-4
logical rack, 1-4
crossing logical rack boundaries, 1-5
significance of, 1-6

M
major error, 7-1
manuals, related, P-3
master device, 1-2
maximum inrush current, power supply
specification, B-2
minor error, 7-1
module release, 2-4, 5-2
motor starters (bulletin 509), surge
suppressors, B-17
motor starters (bulletin 709), surge
suppressors, B-17
mounting your SLC 500 control system,
B-19

power conditioning considerations, B-15


isolation, B-15
suppression, B-15
power considerations, common power
source, B-13
power supplies
calculating power supply loading, B-31
determining power supply dissipation,
B-33
specifications
24V dc user power output current,
B-2
24V dc user power output voltage,
B-2
ambient operating temperature rating,
B-2
fuse protection, B-2
humidity rating, B-2
internal current capacity, B-2
line voltage, B-2
maximum inrush current, B-2
storage temperature, B-2
typical line power requirement, B-2
wiring, B-2
power supply loading specification, A-1

N
network specifications, A-1
noise generators, B-16
normal operation, 6-2
exceptions, 6-3
status display codes, 7-2

O
octal labeling information, image bit
numbering, 1-5
operation, 6-2
exceptions, 6-3
status display codes for normal operating
conditions, 7-2
output contact protection, B-18

P
PLC application example, 8-16
application example program, 8-24
ASB module 1 configuration, 8-19
ASB module 1 I/O mapping, 8-21
ASB module 2 configuration, 8-20
ASB module 2 I/O mapping, 8-22
PLC processor image, 8-18
RIO address label examples, 8-23
RIO device configuration, 8-17

power supply specifications, B-1


power up and initialization,
check mode, 6-2
save mode, 6-2

6-1

processor restart lockout, 4-17


in basic SLC example, 8-2, 8-4
in PLC example, 8-17, 8-19, 8-20
in SLC example, 8-8, 8-10, 8-11
not selecting, 6-4
selecting, 6-4
switch wiring, 5-5
publications, related, P-3

R
rack boundaries, crossing logical, 1-5
relays, surge suppressors for, B-17
remote chassis, 3-2
slot numbering, 3-2
with I/O modules, 1-1
with remote I/O, 1-2
remote expansion chassis, 3-2
slot numbering, 3-2
with I/O modules, 1-1
with remote I/O, 1-2
remote expansion chassis power loss,
6-5
remote I/O overview, 1-2

Index

removable terminal blocks (RTB)


installing, B-29
removing, B-28
required tools and equipment,

wiring layout, B-8


SLC application example, 8-7
application example program, 8-15
ASB module 1 configuration, 8-10
ASB module 1 I/O mapping, 8-12
ASB module 2 configuration, 8-11
ASB module 2 I/O mapping, 8-13
processor image, 8-9
RIO address label examples, 8-14
RIO device configuration, 8-8

2-1

reset, adapter decide, 6-3


status display codes, 7-2
reset, adapter reset, 6-3
status display codes, 7-2
RIO
compatible adapters, 1-11
compatible scanners, 1-10
RIO adapters,

slot numbering, 3-2


ASB module placement,

5-6

RIO address label, 8-5


basic SLC application example, 8-5
PLC application example, 8-23
PLC example, 5-6
SLC application example, 8-14
SLC example, 5-6
RIO device configuration, 8-17
basic SLC application example, 8-2
PLC application example, 8-17
SLC application example, 8-8
RIO link, 1-2
invalid link transfers, 6-5
physical and logical specifications,
RIO scan time, throughput, A-5

S
save mode, 6-2
scanner, 1-2
as master, 1-2
extended node capability, 1-9
image division, 1-4
logical groups, 1-4
logical racks, 1-4
interaction with adapters, 1-2
overview, 1-2
selecting a 1746 power supply, B-3
example, B-3
worksheet, B-5
slave device, 1-2
SLC 500 system installation, B-6
emergency-stop switches, B-12
grounding guidelines, B-9
master control relay, B-11
output contact protection, B-18
power conditioning considerations,
B-15
preventing excessive heat, B-8
selecting an enclosure, B-6
spacing your enclosures, B-7
special considerations, B-16

I5

1-9

slot pairing,

3-2

8-12

special considerations, B-16


SLC 500 system installation
excessive line voltage variations,
B-16
excessive noise, B-16
specialty I/O mode, 4-20
in PLC example, 8-17, 8-21
in SLC basic example, 8-2
in SLC example, 8-8, 8-12, 8-13
specialty I/O modules, 3-14
mapping, 3-14
block transfer mode, 3-14
discrete mode, 3-16
overview, 3-13
specifications, A-1
network specifications, A-1
power supplies
24V dc user power output current,
B-2
24V dc user power output voltage,
B-2
ambient operating temperature rating,
B-2
fuse protection, B-2
humidity rating, B-2
internal current capacity, B-2
line voltage, B-2
maximum inrush current, B-2
storage temperature, B-2
typical line power requirement, B-2
wiring, B-2
power supply loading, A-1
temperature and humidity, A-1
throughput, A-1
start up and operation, 6-1
status display codes, 7-2
DIP switch configuration mismatch fault
codes, 7-5
error operating codes for error conditions,
7-3
I/O module configuration mismatch fault
codes, 7-6

I6

Index

I/O runtime fault codes, 7-7


status operating codes for normal
operating conditions, 7-2
status operating codes for normal operating
conditions, 7-2
storage temperature, power supply
specification, B-2
surge suppressors
for contactor, B-17
for motor starters, B-17
for relays, B-17
SW 1, 4-2
DIP switch,

4-2

SW 2, 4-4
DIP switch,

4-4

SW 3, 4-15
DIP switch, 4-15
addressing mode, 4-20
hold last state, 4-15
I/O module keying, 4-21
last chassis/PLC 3 backup, 4-19
link response time, 4-18
power up and initialization, 6-1
processor restart lockout, 4-17
specialty I/O mode, 4-20
system startup, 6-1
system start up, 6-1
status display code, 7-3

T
temperature specifications, A-1

terms, P-3
testing the ASB module,

6-7

throughput, A-2
calculating throughput, A-4
block transfer, A-11
with block transfers present, A-8,
A-9
without block transfers present, A-4
introduction, A-2
tools needed, 2-1
transferring data with RIO discrete and
block transfers, 1-7
overview, 1-7
RIO discrete example, 1-7
troubleshooting, 7-1
contacting Allen-Bradley, P-6, 7-1
major error, 7-1
minor error, 7-1
typical line power requirement, power
supply specification, B-2

W
wiring, I/O modules, B-27
wiring a processor restart lockout switch,
5-5
status display code, 7-2
wiring and grounding guidelines, B-9
wiring, power supply specification, B-2

AllenBradley, a Rockwell Automation Business, has been helping its customers improve
productivity and quality for more than 90 years. We design, manufacture and support a broad
range of automation products worldwide. They include logic processors, power and motion
control devices, operator interfaces, sensors and a variety of software. Rockwell is one of the
world's leading technology companies.

Worldwide representation.
Argentina Australia Austria Bahrain Belgium Brazil Bulgaria Canada Chile China, PRC Colombia Costa Rica Croatia Cyprus Czech Republic
Denmark Ecuador Egypt El Salvador Finland France Germany Greece Guatemala Honduras Hong Kong Hungary Iceland India Indonesia
Ireland Israel Italy Jamaica Japan Jordan Korea Kuwait Lebanon Malaysia Mexico Netherlands New Zealand Norway Pakistan Peru
Philippines Poland Portugal Puerto Rico Qatar Romania Russia-CIS Saudi Arabia Singapore Slovakia Slovenia South Africa, Republic Spain
Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Thailand Turkey United Arab Emirates United Kingdom United States Uruguay Venezuela Yugoslavia

AllenBradley Headquarters, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204 USA, Tel: (1) 414 3822000 Fax: (1) 414 3824444

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996


Supersedes Publication 17476.13 - March 1996

PN 4007202201(C)

Copyright 1996 AllenBradley Company, Inc. Printed in USA

Publication 17476.13 - December 1996

You might also like